1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \begin_inset Note Note
211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
212 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
213 \begin_inset Newline newline
218 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
226 \begin_layout Standard
227 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
228 LatexCommand tableofcontents
235 \begin_layout Chapter
239 \begin_layout Section
240 What is \SpecialChar LyX
244 \begin_layout Standard
246 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
247 \begin_inset Note Note
250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
252 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
253 Document Notes and Questions
256 \begin_layout Itemize
258 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
259 The menu selection Navigate
261 \SpecialChar menuseparator
264 Bookmarks does not appear to work as described
267 \begin_layout Itemize
269 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
270 Would love to see some kind of diagram showing how classes, modules, layouts,
271 or whatever else all relate.
272 It is not clear how all of these things work together.
275 \begin_layout Itemize
277 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
278 Change tracking does not appear to work in equations
286 is a document preparation system.
287 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
288 scripts, publishable books, business
289 letters and proposals,
290 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
294 It is unlike most other
295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
302 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
304 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
320 pt type, left justified, 5
321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
330 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
334 \begin_layout Standard
335 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
340 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
344 \begin_layout Standard
349 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
350 's philosophy: most importantly,
351 the format of all of the manuals.
352 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
353 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
354 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
357 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
364 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
366 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
367 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
373 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
374 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
376 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
377 only a vertical scrollbar.
380 \begin_layout Standard
381 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
382 The first case is large images.
383 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
384 the image and use the option
395 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
398 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
401 \begin_layout Standard
402 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
403 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
411 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
418 \begin_layout Section
422 \begin_layout Standard
423 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
425 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
427 Just select the manual you want to read from the
434 \begin_layout Section
435 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
439 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
446 \begin_layout Standard
447 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
448 can be configured via the menu
450 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
454 \begin_inset Index idx
457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
464 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
466 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
467 packages are available.
468 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
470 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
471 was installed on your system,
472 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
477 \begin_inset space \space{}
480 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
483 To force \SpecialChar LyX
484 to re-inspect your system use
486 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
490 \begin_inset Index idx
493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
494 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
500 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
501 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
504 \begin_layout Section
507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
509 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
516 \begin_layout Standard
517 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
518 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 installed but you will not be
521 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
522 or print your documents
526 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
527 Some \SpecialChar LyX
528 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
537 which can produce PDFs and the like.
540 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
542 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
545 every \SpecialChar LyX
546 document can still be output as plain text
547 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
553 \begin_layout Standard
554 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
556 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
560 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
561 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
564 \begin_layout Standard
565 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
566 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
567 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
570 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
578 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
579 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
582 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
586 \begin_inset Index idx
589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
590 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
598 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
605 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
609 \begin_layout Chapter
610 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
614 \begin_layout Section
615 Basic File Operations
616 \begin_inset Index idx
619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
628 \begin_layout Standard
633 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
634 in addition to some more advanced operations:
637 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-new-template"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
715 \begin_layout Itemize
717 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
729 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
745 \begin_layout Itemize
747 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
755 \begin_layout Itemize
777 \begin_layout Itemize
789 arg "buffer-write-as"
793 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
797 \begin_layout Itemize
799 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
815 \begin_layout Itemize
829 \begin_layout Itemize
843 \begin_layout Standard
844 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
845 a few minor differences.
848 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
859 command lists the available templates.
860 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
861 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
862 and possibly propose text fragments
864 for the document, features
865 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
868 you would otherwise need to
869 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
871 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
875 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
879 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
887 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
893 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
894 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
898 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
939 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
940 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
941 is just that — a big, blank space.
949 \begin_layout Standard
970 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
975 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
978 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
996 will reload the document from disk.
997 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
998 and want to restore it to the last save.
1002 \begin_inset space ~
1007 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1008 them as your changes.
1011 \begin_layout Section
1012 Basic Editing Features
1013 \begin_inset Index idx
1016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1025 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1032 \begin_layout Standard
1033 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1034 can perform cut and paste operations
1035 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1036 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1037 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1038 editing features and how to access
1040 We will start with cut and paste.
1043 \begin_layout Standard
1044 As you might expect, the
1048 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
1049 various other editing features.
1050 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1054 \begin_layout Itemize
1060 \begin_inset Index idx
1063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1092 \begin_layout Itemize
1098 \begin_inset Index idx
1101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1130 \begin_layout Itemize
1136 \begin_inset Index idx
1139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1164 \begin_layout Itemize
1168 \begin_inset space ~
1174 \begin_layout Itemize
1178 \begin_inset space ~
1184 \begin_layout Itemize
1188 \begin_inset space ~
1192 \begin_inset space ~
1198 \begin_inset Index idx
1201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1210 \begin_inset Index idx
1213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1228 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1238 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1244 \begin_layout Standard
1245 The first three are self-explanatory.
1246 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1247 and other programs by
1268 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1269 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1274 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1275 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1276 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1277 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1278 into individual cells.
1282 \begin_inset space ~
1287 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1288 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1292 \begin_layout Standard
1296 \begin_inset space ~
1301 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1303 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1305 \begin_inset space ~
1312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1318 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1319 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1320 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1326 \begin_inset space \space{}
1329 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1330 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1336 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1338 \begin_inset space ~
1342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1346 \begin_inset space ~
1355 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1356 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1358 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1362 \begin_inset space ~
1367 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1368 start a new paragraph.
1369 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1370 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1378 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1384 \begin_inset space ~
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1395 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1398 paste from the primary selection.
1399 This is normally the currently selected text.
1402 \begin_layout Standard
1405 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1407 \begin_inset space ~
1411 \begin_inset space ~
1419 \begin_inset space ~
1423 \begin_inset space ~
1429 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1435 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1438 \begin_inset space ~
1447 \begin_inset space ~
1452 button to skip the current word.
1456 \begin_inset space ~
1461 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1465 \begin_inset space ~
1470 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1472 If the toggle is set, searching for
1473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1484 will not match the word
1485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1499 Match whole words only
1501 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1502 to only find complete words, e.
1503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1532 offers also an advanced
1535 \begin_inset space ~
1539 \begin_inset space ~
1544 feature that is described in section
1545 \begin_inset space ~
1549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1551 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1558 \begin_layout Standard
1559 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1560 \begin_inset space \space{}
1564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1572 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1574 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1579 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1586 \begin_layout Standard
1590 arg "inset-select-all"
1593 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1594 When the cursor is inside an inset
1597 arg "inset-select-all"
1600 selects the content of the inset.
1604 arg "inset-select-all"
1607 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1612 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1615 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1619 \begin_layout Section
1621 \begin_inset Index idx
1624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1631 \begin_inset Index idx
1634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1650 \begin_layout Standard
1651 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1653 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1656 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1659 or the toolbar button
1665 to undo some mistake.
1666 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1668 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 or the toolbar button
1678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1685 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1689 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1692 \begin_layout Standard
1693 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1702 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1703 This is a consequence of the 100
1704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1707 step undo limit mentioned above.
1710 \begin_layout Standard
1719 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1721 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1725 \begin_layout Section
1727 \begin_inset Index idx
1730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1739 \begin_layout Standard
1740 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1743 \begin_layout Enumerate
1748 \begin_layout Itemize
1753 once anywhere in the edit window.
1754 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1758 \begin_layout Enumerate
1763 \begin_layout Itemize
1770 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1773 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1776 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1777 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1780 \begin_layout Itemize
1781 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1784 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1791 \begin_layout Enumerate
1792 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1798 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1802 \begin_layout Section
1804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1806 name "sec:Navigating"
1811 \begin_inset Index idx
1814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1823 \begin_layout Standard
1825 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1828 \begin_layout Itemize
1833 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1834 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1837 \begin_layout Itemize
1838 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1840 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1847 or by the toolbar button
1850 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1856 \begin_layout Itemize
1857 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1859 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1862 and use the same menu to return to them.
1863 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1866 \begin_layout Standard
1870 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1875 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1876 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1878 \begin_inset space ~
1883 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1884 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1885 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1886 your last editing position.
1889 \begin_layout Standard
1894 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1898 \begin_layout Subsection
1900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1902 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1907 \begin_inset Index idx
1910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1911 Navigating ! Outline
1917 \begin_inset Index idx
1920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1929 \begin_layout Standard
1930 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1931 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1932 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1940 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1944 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1951 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1956 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1960 \begin_layout Standard
1961 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1962 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1963 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1964 dialog and to modify the citation.
1967 \begin_layout Standard
1972 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1973 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1975 Labels and References
1977 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1986 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1991 you further to control the display.
1996 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1997 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
2003 option keeps it in the current view state.
2004 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
2005 \begin_inset space ~
2008 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2009 \begin_inset space ~
2012 3, the subsections of sections
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2016 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2021 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2022 \begin_inset space ~
2026 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2036 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2039 \begin_layout Standard
2046 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
2047 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2061 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2062 So, for example, you can move section
2063 \begin_inset space ~
2067 \begin_inset space ~
2070 2.4 or after section
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2076 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2089 (or the corresponding key bindings
2097 ) you can change the level of sections.
2098 So you can for example make section
2099 \begin_inset space ~
2103 \begin_inset space ~
2107 \begin_inset space ~
2113 \begin_layout Standard
2114 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2115 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2118 \begin_layout Subsection
2119 Horizontal Scrolling
2120 \begin_inset Index idx
2123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2124 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2132 \begin_layout Standard
2134 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2140 \begin_inset space \space{}
2144 \begin_inset space ~
2147 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2148 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2149 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2153 \begin_layout Standard
2154 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2158 \begin_layout Itemize
2160 is used on a small tablet computer
2163 \begin_layout Itemize
2164 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2176 \begin_inset space ~
2189 \begin_layout Itemize
2190 Math constructs with long command names
2193 \begin_layout Standard
2194 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2195 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2197 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2198 windows so that table
2199 \begin_inset space ~
2203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2205 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2210 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2212 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2213 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2216 \begin_layout Standard
2217 \begin_inset Float table
2224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2225 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2230 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2234 Horizontal scrolling test.
2242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2244 \begin_inset Tabular
2245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2291 \begin_layout Section
2292 Input/Word Completion
2293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2295 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_layout Standard
2346 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2348 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2349 is used to propose completions.
2352 \begin_layout Standard
2353 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2356 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2361 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2368 \begin_inset space ~
2372 \begin_inset space ~
2377 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2381 \begin_inset space ~
2386 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2387 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2391 \begin_inset space ~
2397 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2398 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2399 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2400 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2403 \begin_layout Standard
2405 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2406 completions available.
2411 key to accept a proposed completion.
2412 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2413 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2414 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2421 \begin_layout Standard
2422 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2423 ing options for text.
2425 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2427 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2429 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2432 he special math option
2436 enables characters to be composed.
2437 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2438 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2441 , you can then input the characters
2442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2453 to a formula to get it.
2454 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2455 of the math toolbar.
2456 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2460 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2461 's installation folder.
2463 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2464 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2471 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2476 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2477 In the example above,
2482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2514 \begin_layout Section
2516 \begin_inset Index idx
2519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2526 \begin_inset Index idx
2529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2558 \begin_inset Index idx
2561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2592 \begin_layout Standard
2593 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2607 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2610 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2614 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2615 \begin_inset space ~
2619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2621 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2628 \begin_layout Standard
2632 \begin_inset space ~
2640 \begin_inset space ~
2661 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2665 \begin_layout Labeling
2666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2670 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2671 LatexCommand nomenclature
2673 description "Tabulator key"
2680 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2682 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2683 \begin_inset space ~
2687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2689 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2696 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2700 , especially section
2701 \begin_inset space ~
2705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2707 reference "subsec:Lists"
2713 If you are still confused, look in the
2718 \begin_inset Newline newline
2726 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2727 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2731 \begin_layout Labeling
2732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2736 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2737 LatexCommand nomenclature
2739 description "Escape key"
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2754 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2755 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2758 \begin_layout Labeling
2759 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2765 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset space ~
2776 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2777 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2781 \begin_layout Standard
2782 There are three modifier keys:
2785 \begin_layout Labeling
2786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2804 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2805 LatexCommand nomenclature
2807 description "Control key"
2812 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2813 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2817 \begin_layout Itemize
2826 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2829 \begin_layout Itemize
2838 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2841 \begin_layout Itemize
2850 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2854 \begin_layout Labeling
2855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2873 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2874 LatexCommand nomenclature
2876 description "Shift key"
2881 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2882 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2885 \begin_layout Labeling
2886 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2904 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2905 LatexCommand nomenclature
2907 description "Alt or Meta key"
2912 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2913 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2914 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2920 \begin_inset Newline newline
2923 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2925 menu accelerator keys
2928 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2929 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2933 \begin_layout Standard
2934 For example, the sequence
2935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2941 \begin_inset space ~
2945 \begin_inset space ~
2951 \begin_inset space ~
2959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2978 \begin_inset space ~
2984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 \begin_layout Standard
2999 manual lists all other things bound to the
3007 \begin_layout Standard
3008 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
3010 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
3011 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3012 's main window which describes the name of the action you
3013 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
3014 The \SpecialChar LyX
3015 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3016 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3017 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
3019 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3035 followed by a capital
3042 \begin_layout Chapter
3045 \begin_inset Index idx
3048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3058 \begin_layout Section
3060 \begin_inset Index idx
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3072 \begin_layout Subsection
3076 \begin_layout Standard
3077 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3078 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3079 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3080 numbering schemes, and so on.
3081 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3082 and format the title of your document differently.
3085 \begin_layout Standard
3090 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3091 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3092 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3093 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3094 picks one for you by default.
3095 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3098 \begin_layout Subsection
3100 \begin_inset Index idx
3103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3112 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3119 \begin_layout Standard
3120 You can select a class using the
3122 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3123 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 \begin_inset Index idx
3130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3137 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3145 \begin_layout Standard
3146 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3151 \begin_layout Description
3152 Article for basic articles
3155 \begin_layout Description
3156 Report for basic reports
3159 \begin_layout Description
3160 Book for writing a book
3163 \begin_layout Description
3164 Letter for US-style letters
3167 \begin_layout Standard
3168 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3169 only uses if you have installed
3170 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3171 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3172 distributions will include
3174 Here are some of the classes.
3175 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3177 Special Document Classes
3186 \begin_layout Description
3187 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3190 \begin_layout Description
3191 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3195 \begin_layout Description
3196 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3200 \begin_layout Description
3201 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3202 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3203 There are three article layouts available.
3204 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3205 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3206 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3207 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3212 sequential numbering
3213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3216 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3217 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3218 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3219 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3222 \begin_layout Description
3223 Beamer Layout for presentations
3226 \begin_layout Description
3227 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3228 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3229 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3230 with \SpecialChar LyX
3234 \begin_layout Description
3235 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3238 \begin_layout Description
3240 \begin_inset space ~
3243 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3246 \begin_layout Description
3247 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3250 \begin_layout Description
3251 Foils Used to make transparencies
3254 \begin_layout Description
3255 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3256 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3257 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3258 with \SpecialChar LyX
3262 \begin_layout Description
3263 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3264 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3267 \begin_layout Description
3268 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3271 \begin_layout Description
3272 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3275 \begin_layout Description
3276 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3277 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3278 (Is used by this document.)
3281 \begin_layout Description
3282 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3285 \begin_layout Description
3286 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3289 \begin_layout Description
3294 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3295 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3297 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3301 \begin_layout Description
3302 Slides Used to make transparencies
3305 \begin_layout Description
3307 \begin_inset space ~
3310 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3311 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3314 \begin_layout Description
3315 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3318 \begin_layout Standard
3319 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3321 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3323 Special Document Classes
3330 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3331 of the document classes.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3338 \begin_layout Standard
3339 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3342 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3344 \begin_inset Index idx
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3364 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3365 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3367 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3370 \begin_layout Standard
3373 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3378 , are highly specialized.
3380 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3381 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3382 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3383 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3384 by some document class.
3385 There are just too many of them.
3386 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3389 \begin_layout Standard
3390 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3398 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3399 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3400 document class for a new file.
3402 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3405 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3412 manual for information on how to install them.
3413 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3419 \begin_layout Standard
3420 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3421 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3422 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3423 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3424 class files to be used for dissertation
3425 s submitted to those universities.
3426 The \SpecialChar LyX
3427 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3429 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3433 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3439 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3446 name "subsec:Modules"
3451 \begin_inset Index idx
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3463 \begin_layout Standard
3464 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3465 chosen document class.
3466 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3467 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3478 \begin_inset Index idx
3481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3492 \begin_layout Standard
3493 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3494 packages or file format converters that are not always
3495 installed by default.
3497 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3498 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3499 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3500 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3502 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3503 file without the missing prerequisites.
3504 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3505 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3508 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3512 \begin_inset Index idx
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3516 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3522 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3527 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3530 \begin_layout Standard
3531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3539 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3541 will advise you about these things.
3549 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3553 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3558 \begin_inset Index idx
3561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 Document ! Local Layout
3570 \begin_layout Standard
3571 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3572 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3573 : They are intended to be used in
3574 a variety of different documents.
3575 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3576 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3577 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3578 need a specific inset or
3579 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3581 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3584 style only that one time.
3585 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3587 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3605 manual for information on how to use it.
3608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3612 \begin_layout Standard
3613 Each class has a default set of options.
3614 Here's a quick table describing them:
3617 \begin_layout Standard
3618 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3624 \begin_layout Standard
3626 \begin_inset Tabular
3627 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3628 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3629 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3630 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3631 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3632 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3633 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4094 \begin_layout Standard
4095 You're probably also wondering what
4096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4108 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4109 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4114 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4119 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4129 headings, there are also
4137 headings, and so on.
4138 We will describe these headings fully in section
4139 \begin_inset space ~
4143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4145 reference "subsec:Headings"
4152 \begin_layout Subsection
4154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4156 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4161 \begin_inset Index idx
4164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4171 \begin_inset Index idx
4174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4183 \begin_layout Standard
4184 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4193 \begin_inset space ~
4201 \begin_inset space ~
4206 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4208 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4209 doesn't support special options you want to
4210 use for your document.
4211 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4212 -class and its options, you have to read
4216 \begin_layout Standard
4218 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4222 \change_inserted -712698321 1597235164
4226 \begin_inset space ~
4233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4244 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4245 You can choose between the following five options:
4248 \begin_layout Labeling
4249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4254 Use default page style of current class.
4257 \begin_layout Labeling
4258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4263 No page numbers or headings.
4266 \begin_layout Labeling
4267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4275 \begin_layout Labeling
4276 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4281 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4282 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4283 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4284 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4287 \begin_layout Labeling
4288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4293 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4294 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4300 \begin_inset Index idx
4303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4311 How they are defined is explained in section
4312 \begin_inset space ~
4316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4318 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4325 \begin_layout Standard
4326 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4327 \begin_inset space ~
4331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4333 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4340 \begin_layout Subsection
4341 Paper Size and Orientation
4342 \begin_inset Index idx
4345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4346 Document ! Paper size
4352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4354 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4361 \begin_layout Standard
4362 You can find the following options in the menu
4365 \begin_inset space ~
4372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4376 \begin_inset Index idx
4379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4388 \begin_layout Labeling
4389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4393 \begin_inset space ~
4398 What size paper to print on.
4403 \begin_layout Itemize
4409 \begin_layout Itemize
4415 \begin_layout Itemize
4421 \begin_layout Itemize
4427 \begin_layout Itemize
4430 US letter, US legal, US executive
4433 \begin_layout Itemize
4439 \begin_layout Itemize
4446 \begin_layout Labeling
4447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4452 To choose whether to output as
4463 \begin_layout Labeling
4464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4468 \begin_inset space ~
4473 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4474 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4477 \begin_layout Subsection
4479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4481 name "subsec:Margins"
4486 \begin_inset Index idx
4489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4496 \begin_inset Index idx
4499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4508 \begin_layout Standard
4509 Paper margins are set in the menu
4511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4515 \begin_inset Index idx
4518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4527 \begin_layout Standard
4528 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4529 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4530 the paper format and the font size into account.
4533 \begin_layout Subsection
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4538 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4544 That includes the paragraph environments.
4545 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4546 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4547 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4549 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4558 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4560 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4561 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4562 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4565 \begin_layout Section
4566 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4567 \begin_inset Index idx
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 Paragraph ! Indentation
4579 \begin_layout Subsection
4581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4583 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4590 \begin_layout Standard
4591 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4592 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4595 \begin_layout Standard
4596 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4597 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4598 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4599 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4603 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4609 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4610 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4611 language than English.
4613 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4616 \begin_layout Standard
4617 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4618 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4619 into \SpecialChar LyX
4621 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4624 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4626 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4627 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4628 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4635 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4636 goes to produce a printable file.
4641 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4643 gives you the ability globally to change
4647 these pre-coded spacings.
4648 We will explain more later.
4651 \begin_layout Subsection
4652 Paragraph Separation
4653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4655 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4660 \begin_inset Index idx
4663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4664 Paragraph ! Separation
4672 \begin_layout Standard
4680 \begin_inset space ~
4688 \begin_inset space ~
4695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4699 \begin_inset Index idx
4702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4708 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4711 \begin_layout Subsection
4715 \begin_layout Standard
4716 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4719 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4721 \begin_inset space ~
4726 dialog and toggle the
4729 \begin_inset space ~
4734 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4737 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4741 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4742 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4746 \begin_layout Standard
4747 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4748 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4751 \begin_layout Subsection
4753 \begin_inset Index idx
4756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4757 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4765 \begin_layout Standard
4768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4772 \begin_inset Index idx
4775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4784 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4788 \begin_inset space ~
4797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4798 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4804 \begin_inset Index idx
4807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4814 installed to use this feature.
4819 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4821 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4823 \begin_inset space ~
4828 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4829 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4832 \begin_layout Section
4833 Paragraph Environments
4834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4836 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4841 \begin_inset Index idx
4844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4845 Paragraph ! Environments
4851 \begin_inset Index idx
4854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4855 Paragraph environments|(
4863 \begin_layout Subsection
4867 \begin_layout Standard
4868 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4871 \begin_layout Standard
4880 } \SpecialChar ldots
4890 \begin_inset Newline newline
4893 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4895 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4896 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4897 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4906 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4909 \begin_layout Standard
4910 A paragraph environment is simply a
4911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4918 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4919 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4920 scheme, labels, and so on.
4921 Additionally, you can
4922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4929 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4930 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4931 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4932 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4934 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4936 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4939 \begin_layout Standard
4940 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4941 \begin_inset Graphics
4942 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4948 at the left end of the toolbar.
4950 will change the environment of the
4954 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4955 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4956 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4960 \begin_layout Standard
4969 create a new paragraph using the
4973 paragraph environment.
4975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4982 because if you are in one of these environments:
4985 \begin_layout Itemize
4991 \begin_layout Itemize
4997 \begin_layout Itemize
5003 \begin_layout Itemize
5009 \begin_layout Itemize
5015 \begin_layout Itemize
5021 \begin_layout Itemize
5027 \begin_layout Standard
5029 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5033 , rather than resetting it to
5038 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5039 \begin_inset space ~
5043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5045 reference "sec:Nesting"
5052 \begin_layout Subsection
5056 \begin_layout Standard
5057 The default paragraph environment is
5062 It creates a plain paragraph.
5064 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5065 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5066 this manual) are in the
5073 \begin_layout Standard
5074 You can nest a paragraph using the
5078 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5086 \begin_layout Subsection
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5100 \begin_layout Standard
5101 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5102 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5111 for thanks or contact information.
5112 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5113 places all of this on a separate page
5114 along with today's date.
5115 For other types of documents, the title
5116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5123 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5127 \begin_layout Standard
5129 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5143 Here's how you use them:
5146 \begin_layout Itemize
5147 Put the title of your document in the
5154 \begin_layout Itemize
5155 Put the author name in the
5162 \begin_layout Itemize
5163 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5164 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5170 Note that using this environment is optional.
5171 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5172 will automatically insert today's date.
5173 If you don't want a date, use the option
5175 Suppress default date on front page
5179 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5180 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5182 \begin_inset space ~
5190 \begin_layout Standard
5191 You can use footnotes to insert
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 or contact information.
5202 \begin_layout Subsection
5204 \begin_inset Index idx
5207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5216 name "subsec:Headings"
5223 \begin_layout Standard
5224 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5226 takes care of the numbering for you.
5229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5231 \begin_inset Index idx
5234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5235 Section headings ! Numbered
5243 \begin_layout Standard
5244 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5248 \begin_layout Enumerate
5254 \begin_layout Enumerate
5260 \begin_layout Enumerate
5266 \begin_layout Enumerate
5272 \begin_layout Enumerate
5278 \begin_layout Enumerate
5284 \begin_layout Enumerate
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5292 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5293 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5294 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5295 \change_inserted -131811572 1596358186
5297 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5303 \begin_layout Standard
5304 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5305 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5306 You group the book into chapters.
5308 does a similar grouping:
5311 \begin_layout Itemize
5316 is divided into either
5327 \begin_layout Itemize
5339 \begin_layout Itemize
5351 \begin_layout Itemize
5363 \begin_layout Itemize
5375 \begin_layout Itemize
5387 \begin_layout Standard
5388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5396 Not all document types use the
5400 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5405 is the top-level heading.
5413 \begin_layout Standard
5418 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5419 labels it with its number,
5420 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5422 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5434 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5436 \begin_inset Index idx
5439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5440 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5448 \begin_layout Standard
5449 The unnumbered section headings have a
5450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5457 at the end of their name.
5458 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5459 the table of contents, see section
5460 \begin_inset space ~
5464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5474 Changing the Numbering
5475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5477 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5484 \begin_layout Standard
5485 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5486 in the Table of Contents.
5487 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5489 Just as certain classes start with
5503 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5513 This is something you can change.
5516 \begin_layout Standard
5519 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5523 \begin_inset Index idx
5526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5535 \begin_inset space ~
5539 \begin_inset space ~
5544 you will see two counters.
5549 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5550 numbers a section heading.
5551 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5556 Short Titles of Headings
5557 \begin_inset Index idx
5560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5561 Section headings ! Short titles
5567 \begin_inset Argument 1
5570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5579 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5588 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5589 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5590 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5593 \begin_layout Standard
5595 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5596 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5597 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5598 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5603 \begin_inset space ~
5609 This will insert a box labeled
5610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5614 \begin_inset space ~
5618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5621 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5622 This also works for captions inside floats.
5623 There can only be one short title per title.
5626 \begin_layout Standard
5627 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5635 The following information applies to all section headings:
5638 \begin_layout Itemize
5639 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5642 \begin_layout Itemize
5643 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5646 \begin_layout Itemize
5647 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5650 \begin_layout Itemize
5651 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5654 \begin_layout Subsection
5658 \begin_layout Standard
5660 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5674 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5675 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5676 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5677 the text they contain.
5678 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5686 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5689 \begin_layout Standard
5690 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5699 when you start a new paragraph.
5700 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5704 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5705 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5706 have to change back to the
5710 environment yourself.
5713 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5722 \begin_inset Index idx
5725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5736 time for the differences.
5745 are identical except for one difference:
5749 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5758 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5761 \begin_layout Standard
5762 Here's an example of the
5775 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5777 See – no indentation!
5781 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5782 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5783 the other paragraph.
5786 \begin_layout Standard
5787 Here's another example, this time in the
5794 \begin_layout Quotation
5800 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5801 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5802 the first line, then
5806 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5810 you were quoting other text.
5813 \begin_layout Quotation
5814 Here's a new paragraph.
5815 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5816 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5819 \begin_layout Standard
5820 As the examples show,
5824 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5825 They should put quotes in the
5830 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5834 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5839 \begin_inset Index idx
5842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5849 \begin_inset Index idx
5852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5868 \begin_layout Standard
5873 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5879 \begin_inset Newline newline
5882 Which I did not rehearse!
5886 It could be much worse.
5887 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5889 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5890 indented a bit more than the first.
5891 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5897 \begin_inset Newline newline
5900 And make things look fine
5901 \begin_inset Newline newline
5907 arg "newline-insert newline"
5913 \begin_layout Standard
5918 does not indent both margins.
5919 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5920 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5923 arg "newline-insert newline"
5929 \begin_layout Subsection
5931 \begin_inset Index idx
5934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5950 \begin_layout Standard
5952 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5962 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5963 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5972 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5973 lets you provide your own label.
5974 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5975 describing some general features of all four of them.
5978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5985 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5986 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5995 reset the environment to
5999 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6000 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6001 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6005 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6009 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6016 \begin_layout Standard
6017 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6018 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6019 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6021 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6022 you read all of section
6023 \begin_inset space ~
6027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6029 reference "sec:Nesting"
6036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6038 \begin_inset Index idx
6041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6057 \begin_layout Standard
6058 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6062 paragraph environment.
6063 It has the following properties:
6066 \begin_layout Itemize
6067 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6071 \begin_layout Itemize
6073 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6076 \begin_layout Itemize
6077 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6081 \begin_layout Itemize
6082 The items can have any length.
6084 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6085 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6092 \begin_layout Itemize
6097 environment inside another
6101 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6105 \begin_layout Itemize
6106 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6109 \begin_layout Itemize
6111 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6114 \begin_layout Itemize
6116 \begin_inset space ~
6120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6122 reference "sec:Nesting"
6126 for a full explanation of nesting.
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6140 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6143 \begin_layout Standard
6144 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6145 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6148 \begin_layout Itemize
6149 The label for the first level
6153 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6157 \begin_layout Itemize
6158 The label for the second level is a dash.
6162 \begin_layout Itemize
6163 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6167 \begin_layout Itemize
6168 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6172 \begin_layout Itemize
6173 Back out to the third level.
6177 \begin_layout Itemize
6178 Back to the second level.
6182 \begin_layout Itemize
6183 Back to the outermost level.
6186 \begin_layout Standard
6187 These are the default labels for an
6192 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6197 dialog in the submenu
6202 \begin_inset Index idx
6205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6211 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6215 \begin_layout Standard
6216 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6217 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6219 \begin_inset space ~
6223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6225 reference "sec:Nesting"
6232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6234 \begin_inset Index idx
6237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6246 name "sec:Enumerate"
6253 \begin_layout Standard
6258 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6259 It has these properties:
6262 \begin_layout Enumerate
6263 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6267 \begin_layout Enumerate
6268 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6272 \begin_layout Enumerate
6274 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6277 \begin_layout Enumerate
6282 environment resets the counter to one.
6285 \begin_layout Enumerate
6298 \begin_layout Enumerate
6299 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6300 Items can have any length.
6303 \begin_layout Enumerate
6304 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6307 \begin_layout Enumerate
6308 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6311 \begin_layout Enumerate
6312 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6316 \begin_layout Standard
6325 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6327 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6328 labels the four different levels in an
6335 \begin_layout Enumerate
6336 The first level of an
6340 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6344 \begin_layout Enumerate
6345 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6349 \begin_layout Enumerate
6350 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6354 \begin_layout Enumerate
6355 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6358 \begin_layout Enumerate
6359 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6364 \begin_layout Enumerate
6365 Back to the third level
6369 \begin_layout Enumerate
6370 Back to the second level.
6374 \begin_layout Enumerate
6375 Back to the outermost level.
6378 \begin_layout Standard
6379 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6383 environment, see section
6384 \begin_inset space ~
6388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6390 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6395 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6399 \begin_layout Standard
6400 There is more to nesting
6404 environments than we've stated here.
6405 You should read section
6406 \begin_inset space ~
6410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6412 reference "sec:Nesting"
6416 to learn more about nesting.
6419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6421 \begin_inset Index idx
6424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6433 \begin_layout Standard
6434 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6438 list has no fixed label.
6439 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6448 of the first line as the label.
6452 \begin_layout Description
6453 Example: This is an example of the
6460 \begin_layout Standard
6462 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6466 \begin_layout Standard
6468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6475 it is meant that the first usage of the
6479 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6481 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6489 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6495 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6497 \begin_inset space ~
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6509 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6513 for more information.) Here is an example:
6516 \begin_layout Description
6518 \begin_inset space ~
6521 Example: This one shows how to use a
6524 \begin_inset space ~
6536 \begin_layout Description
6537 Usage: You should use the
6541 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6542 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6544 It's not a good idea to use a
6548 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6549 You're better off using
6561 paragraphs into them.
6564 \begin_layout Description
6565 Nesting: You can nest
6569 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6575 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6576 them from the first line.
6579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6581 \begin_inset Index idx
6584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6593 \begin_layout Standard
6598 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6599 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6603 \begin_layout Standard
6612 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6614 Here are its properties:
6617 \begin_layout Labeling
6618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6620 \begin_inset space ~
6623 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6632 of each line as the item label.
6637 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6638 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6639 space as described above.
6642 \begin_layout Labeling
6643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6644 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6645 uses different margins for the item label and the
6646 body of the item text.
6647 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6648 label width plus a little extra space.
6652 \begin_layout Labeling
6653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6655 \begin_inset space ~
6658 width \SpecialChar LyX
6659 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6660 If the label width is larger, the label
6661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6668 into the first line.
6669 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6670 margin of the rest of the item text.
6673 \begin_layout Labeling
6674 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6676 \begin_inset space ~
6679 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6684 environment has the same left margin.
6685 \begin_inset Newline newline
6688 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6691 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6693 \begin_inset space ~
6698 dialog (toolbar button
6701 arg "layout-paragraph"
6708 \begin_inset space ~
6713 determines the default label width.
6714 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6723 multiple times instead.
6724 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6734 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6742 every time you alter a label in a
6747 \begin_inset Newline newline
6750 The predefined default width is the length of
6751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6759 \begin_inset space ~
6765 \begin_layout Standard
6770 list the same way as the
6774 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6780 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6784 \begin_layout Standard
6789 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6790 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6792 \begin_inset space ~
6796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6798 reference "sec:Nesting"
6802 to learn about nesting.
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6806 There is yet another feature of the
6810 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6811 left-justifies the item labels by
6813 You can use additional
6817 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6818 justifies the item label.
6823 are documented in section
6824 \begin_inset space ~
6828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6830 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6835 Here are some examples:
6838 \begin_layout Labeling
6839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6840 Left The default for
6847 \begin_layout Labeling
6848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6849 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6856 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6859 \begin_layout Labeling
6860 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6861 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6865 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6872 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6875 \begin_layout Subsection
6877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6879 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6884 \begin_inset Index idx
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6896 \begin_layout Standard
6897 The features described in this section require that the module
6899 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6901 is loaded in the document settings.
6902 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6908 \begin_inset Index idx
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6922 Custom Enumerate Lists
6923 \begin_inset Index idx
6926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6935 \begin_layout Standard
6937 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6943 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6944 There you add the command
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6955 \begin_layout Standard
6967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6968 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6969 Code, look at section
6970 \begin_inset space ~
6974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6976 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6989 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6996 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6997 For capital Roman numerals replace
7009 in the command above.
7010 For Arabic numerals use
7018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7025 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7040 \begin_layout Standard
7042 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7050 You can only number 26
7051 \begin_inset space ~
7054 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7062 \begin_layout Standard
7063 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7064 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7067 \begin_layout Standard
7068 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7071 \begin_layout Enumerate
7072 \begin_inset Argument 1
7075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7101 \begin_layout Enumerate
7102 \begin_inset Argument 1
7105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7128 \begin_layout Enumerate
7133 \begin_layout Enumerate
7134 \begin_inset Argument 1
7137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7161 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 \begin_inset Argument 1
7165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7191 \begin_layout Standard
7192 For this list these commands were used:
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7206 \begin_inset Newline newline
7214 \begin_inset Newline newline
7222 \begin_inset Newline newline
7232 \begin_layout Standard
7239 makes the label emphasized and
7248 \begin_layout Standard
7249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7257 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7258 lists until you change the definition.
7266 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7268 \begin_inset Index idx
7271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7272 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7280 \begin_layout Standard
7281 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7284 \begin_layout Enumerate
7285 \begin_inset Argument 1
7288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 \begin_inset Note Note
7310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 goes back to default numbering
7319 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 \begin_layout Standard
7327 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7331 \begin_layout Standard
7332 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7337 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7338 to indicate that it is a resumed
7339 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7340 , but in the output.
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7344 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7352 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7364 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7365 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7366 of a normal enumeration.
7367 There, insert the command
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7381 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7385 \begin_layout Enumerate
7389 \begin_layout Enumerate
7393 \begin_layout Standard
7394 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7397 \begin_layout Enumerate
7398 \begin_inset Argument 1
7401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7417 This enumeration starts at 4
7420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7422 \begin_inset Index idx
7425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7434 \begin_layout Standard
7435 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7437 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7440 \begin_layout Itemize
7444 \begin_layout Itemize
7445 with standard spacing
7448 \begin_layout Standard
7449 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7451 Add there the command
7455 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7458 \begin_layout Itemize
7459 \begin_inset Argument 1
7462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7481 \begin_layout Itemize
7485 \begin_layout Itemize
7489 \begin_layout Standard
7490 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7497 \begin_inset Index idx
7500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7508 For more information see its documentation,
7509 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7519 \begin_layout Standard
7520 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7522 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7523 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7527 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7530 \begin_layout Enumerate
7531 \begin_inset Argument 1
7534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7542 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7555 \begin_layout Enumerate
7556 with negative indentation
7559 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7560 Further Customization
7561 \begin_inset Index idx
7564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7565 Lists ! Customization
7573 \begin_layout Standard
7574 You can also change the style of description lists.
7578 \begin_layout Standard
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7585 changes the description label font, the command
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7594 \begin_layout Standard
7595 sets the list style.
7598 \begin_layout Standard
7599 An example where the command
7602 \begin_layout Standard
7607 itshape, style=nextline
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7614 \begin_layout Description
7616 \begin_inset space ~
7620 \begin_inset Argument 1
7623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7629 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7631 itshape, style=nextline
7641 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7642 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7646 \begin_layout Description
7648 \begin_inset space ~
7651 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7652 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7653 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7656 \begin_layout Standard
7657 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7663 \begin_inset Index idx
7666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7674 For more information see its documentation
7675 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7685 \begin_layout Subsection
7687 \begin_inset Index idx
7690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset space ~
7704 Address: An Overview
7707 \begin_layout Standard
7708 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7709 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7717 \begin_inset space ~
7723 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7724 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7725 gags on the document.
7726 In contrast, you can use the
7733 \begin_inset space ~
7738 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7739 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7743 \begin_layout Standard
7744 Of course, you're not limited to using
7751 \begin_inset space ~
7760 \begin_inset space ~
7765 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7766 some European academic papers.
7769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7773 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7780 \begin_layout Standard
7785 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7786 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7790 \begin_inset space ~
7795 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7796 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7797 Here's an example of each:
7800 \begin_layout Right Address
7802 \begin_inset Newline newline
7806 \begin_inset Newline newline
7810 \begin_inset Newline newline
7813 When is it? What is today?
7816 \begin_layout Standard
7820 \begin_inset space ~
7826 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7828 the largest block of text on a single line.
7829 Here's an example of the
7836 \begin_layout Address
7838 \begin_inset Newline newline
7841 Where do I send this
7842 \begin_inset Newline newline
7845 Your post office and country
7848 \begin_layout Standard
7849 As you can see, both
7856 \begin_inset space ~
7861 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7866 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7867 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7873 This makes sense, since
7881 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7882 Thus, you have to use
7889 arg "newline-insert newline"
7894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7895 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7897 \begin_inset space ~
7901 \begin_inset space ~
7906 ) to start a new line in an
7913 \begin_inset space ~
7921 \begin_layout Subsection
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7927 or list of references.
7929 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7932 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7934 \begin_inset Index idx
7937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7951 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7952 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7953 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7954 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7968 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7969 The book document classes ignores the
7973 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7977 in a letter document class.
7980 \begin_layout Standard
7985 environment does several things for you.
7986 First, it puts the centered label
7987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7995 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7997 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7998 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7999 the subsequent text.
8000 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8002 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8006 \begin_layout Standard
8007 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8011 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8012 The new paragraph will still be in the
8017 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8018 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8021 \begin_layout Standard
8022 \begin_inset Float figure
8029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8031 \begin_inset Graphics
8032 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8040 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8045 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8066 \begin_layout Standard
8067 We would love to demonstrate the
8071 environment, but since this document is in the
8072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8079 class, we can't do this.
8080 We inserted it therefore as figure
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8087 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8092 If you have never heard of an
8093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8100 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8103 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8105 \begin_inset Index idx
8108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8117 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8124 \begin_layout Standard
8129 environment is used to list references.
8130 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8131 only use it at the end of the document.
8143 \begin_layout Standard
8144 When you first open a
8148 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8149 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8165 depending on the document class.
8166 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8167 Each paragraph of the
8171 environment is a bibliography entry.
8176 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8177 Each new paragraph is still in the
8184 \begin_layout Standard
8185 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8186 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8188 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8190 handling, have a look at section
8191 \begin_inset space ~
8195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8197 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8204 \begin_layout Subsection
8205 Special Environments
8208 \begin_layout Standard
8210 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8211 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8219 \begin_inset Index idx
8222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8232 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8245 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8247 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8252 key as a fixed whitespace.
8256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8269 \begin_inset space ~
8274 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8292 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8295 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8298 arg "newline-insert newline"
8315 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8316 So, when you finish using the
8321 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8322 Also, you can nest the
8327 environment inside of others.
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8334 \begin_layout Itemize
8338 arg "newline-insert newline"
8341 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8346 \begin_inset space \space{}
8356 arg "newline-insert newline"
8362 \begin_layout Itemize
8366 arg "newline-insert newline"
8376 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8382 \begin_layout Itemize
8383 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8384 You must put at least one
8388 in any line you want blank.
8389 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8393 \begin_layout Itemize
8394 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8398 since that will insert
8403 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8406 arg "self-insert \""
8412 \begin_layout Standard
8416 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8420 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8424 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8428 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8432 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8433 printf("Hello World!
8438 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8442 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8446 \begin_layout Standard
8447 This is just the standard
8448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8459 \begin_layout Standard
8465 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8467 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8468 as if you used a typewriter.
8469 \begin_inset Index idx
8472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8473 Paragraph environments|)
8478 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8481 Program Code Listings
8486 \begin_inset space ~
8494 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8498 \begin_inset Index idx
8501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8515 environment is similar to the
8520 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8521 computer console text.
8526 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8540 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8541 you can have empty lines.
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 have a certain language and a text style
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8560 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8561 and \SpecialChar TeX
8565 \begin_layout Standard
8566 Because of these properties
8570 works like a typewriter.
8574 \begin_layout Verbatim
8578 \begin_layout Verbatim
8581 The following 2 lines are empty:
8584 \begin_layout Verbatim
8588 \begin_layout Verbatim
8592 \begin_layout Verbatim
8593 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8598 \begin_layout Standard
8603 environment is identical to
8607 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8608 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8615 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8619 \begin_layout Section
8620 Nesting Environments
8621 \begin_inset Index idx
8624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8625 Nesting ! Environments
8631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8640 \begin_layout Subsection
8644 \begin_layout Standard
8646 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8648 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8650 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8652 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8664 \begin_layout Enumerate
8668 \begin_layout Enumerate
8673 \begin_layout Enumerate
8677 \begin_layout Enumerate
8682 \begin_layout Enumerate
8686 \begin_layout Standard
8687 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8688 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8690 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8692 \begin_inset space ~
8696 \begin_inset space ~
8704 \begin_inset space ~
8708 \begin_inset space ~
8713 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8715 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8718 arg "depth-increment"
8724 arg "depth-decrement"
8738 arg "depth-increment"
8744 arg "depth-decrement"
8748 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8749 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8753 \begin_layout Standard
8754 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8755 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8756 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8757 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8758 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8761 \begin_layout Standard
8762 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8764 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8766 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8769 \begin_layout Subsection
8770 What You Can and Can't Nest
8773 \begin_layout Standard
8774 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8775 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8778 \begin_layout Standard
8779 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8780 than a simple yes or no.
8781 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8784 \begin_layout Itemize
8785 Completely unnestable
8788 \begin_layout Itemize
8789 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8793 \begin_layout Itemize
8794 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8798 \begin_layout Standard
8799 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8800 environments have them:
8803 \begin_layout Description
8804 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8805 Can't nest into them.
8809 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8827 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Description
8842 \begin_inset space ~
8845 Nestable You can nest them.
8846 You can nest other things into them.
8850 \begin_layout Itemize
8856 \begin_layout Itemize
8862 \begin_layout Itemize
8868 \begin_layout Itemize
8874 \begin_layout Itemize
8880 \begin_layout Itemize
8886 \begin_layout Itemize
8892 \begin_layout Itemize
8899 \begin_layout Itemize
8905 \begin_layout Itemize
8912 \begin_layout Description
8913 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8914 You can't nest anything into them.
8918 \begin_layout Itemize
8924 \begin_layout Itemize
8930 \begin_layout Itemize
8936 \begin_layout Itemize
8942 \begin_layout Itemize
8948 \begin_layout Itemize
8954 \begin_layout Itemize
8960 \begin_layout Itemize
8966 \begin_layout Itemize
8972 \begin_layout Itemize
8978 \begin_layout Itemize
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8990 \begin_layout Itemize
8996 \begin_layout Itemize
9000 \begin_inset space ~
9006 \begin_layout Itemize
9013 \begin_layout Standard
9014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9022 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9032 \begin_inset space ~
9035 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9036 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9037 nested section headings violate this.
9045 \begin_layout Subsection
9046 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9047 \begin_inset Index idx
9050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9051 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9059 \begin_layout Standard
9060 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9061 affected by nesting anyhow.
9065 \begin_layout Itemize
9069 \begin_layout Itemize
9073 \begin_layout Itemize
9077 \begin_layout Standard
9079 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 Figures and tables in
9091 are not affected by this.
9096 Have a look at section
9097 \begin_inset space ~
9101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9103 reference "sec:Floats"
9107 for more information about
9114 \begin_layout Standard
9116 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9117 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9121 \begin_layout Standard
9122 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9130 of its own, it behaves just like a
9131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9138 paragraph environment.
9139 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9143 \begin_layout Standard
9144 Here's an example with a table:
9147 \begin_layout Enumerate
9152 \begin_layout Enumerate
9153 This is (a) and it's nested.
9157 \begin_layout Standard
9158 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9164 \begin_layout Standard
9166 \begin_inset Tabular
9167 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9168 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9169 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9170 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9254 \begin_layout Standard
9255 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9262 \begin_layout Enumerate
9264 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9268 \begin_layout Enumerate
9272 \begin_layout Standard
9273 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9276 \begin_layout Enumerate
9281 \begin_layout Enumerate
9282 This is (a) and it's nested.
9286 \begin_layout Standard
9287 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9295 \begin_inset Tabular
9296 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9297 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9298 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9383 \begin_layout Standard
9384 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9390 \begin_layout Enumerate
9397 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9400 \begin_layout Enumerate
9404 \begin_layout Standard
9405 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9409 \begin_layout Standard
9410 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9413 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9416 \begin_layout Enumerate
9421 \begin_layout Enumerate
9422 This is (a) and it's nested.
9425 \begin_layout Standard
9426 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9432 \begin_layout Standard
9434 \begin_inset Tabular
9435 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9436 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9437 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9438 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9523 \begin_layout Standard
9524 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9530 \begin_layout Enumerate
9532 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9539 \begin_layout Enumerate
9543 \begin_layout Standard
9544 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9550 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9551 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9555 \begin_layout Subsection
9556 Usage and General Features
9559 \begin_layout Standard
9560 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9561 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9570 is the innermost possible depth.
9571 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9574 \begin_layout Enumerate
9575 level #1 – outermost
9579 \begin_layout Enumerate
9584 \begin_layout Enumerate
9589 \begin_layout Enumerate
9594 \begin_layout Itemize
9599 \begin_layout Itemize
9608 \begin_layout Standard
9609 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9610 both of them in the example.
9611 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9621 For example, if we tried to nest another
9626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9633 , we would get errors.
9636 \begin_layout Subsection
9638 \begin_inset Index idx
9641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9650 \begin_layout Standard
9651 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9652 We have several examples of nested environments.
9653 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9658 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9661 \begin_layout Labeling
9662 \labelwidthstring MMM
9663 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9672 \begin_layout Labeling
9673 \labelwidthstring MMM
9674 #2-a This is level #2.
9675 We created it by using
9678 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9684 arg "depth-increment"
9691 \begin_layout Labeling
9692 \labelwidthstring MMM
9693 #3-a This is level #3.
9694 This time, we just enter
9701 arg "depth-increment"
9705 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9709 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9715 arg "depth-increment"
9722 \begin_layout Standard
9727 environment, nested inside of
9728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9736 So, it's at level #4.
9737 We did this by entering
9740 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9746 arg "depth-increment"
9749 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9754 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9770 \begin_layout Standard
9775 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9778 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9784 \begin_layout Labeling
9785 \labelwidthstring MMM
9786 #4-a This is level #4.
9790 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9793 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9798 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9802 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9807 keep nesting things inside
9808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9819 \begin_layout Labeling
9820 \labelwidthstring MMM
9821 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9826 \begin_layout Labeling
9827 \labelwidthstring MMM
9828 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9829 and this is level #6.
9830 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9834 \begin_layout Labeling
9835 \labelwidthstring MMM
9836 #5-b Back to level #5.
9840 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9846 arg "depth-decrement"
9853 \begin_layout Labeling
9854 \labelwidthstring MMM
9858 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9864 arg "depth-decrement"
9867 , we're back at level #4.
9871 \begin_layout Labeling
9872 \labelwidthstring MMM
9873 #3-b Back to level #3.
9874 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9878 \begin_layout Labeling
9879 \labelwidthstring MMM
9880 #2-b Back to level #2.
9885 \begin_layout Labeling
9886 \labelwidthstring MMM
9887 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9888 After this sentence, we will enter
9892 and change the paragraph environment back to
9899 \begin_layout Standard
9900 We could have also used the
9916 environment in place of the
9921 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9925 Example 2: Inheritance
9928 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9929 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9932 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9941 arg "depth-increment"
9945 \begin_inset Newline newline
9948 which, we will change to the
9956 \begin_layout Enumerate
9961 environment, at level #2.
9964 \begin_layout Enumerate
9965 Notice how the nested
9969 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9973 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9977 \begin_layout Standard
9978 We ended this example by entering
9983 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9987 and reset the nesting depth by using
9990 arg "depth-decrement"
9996 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9997 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10006 \begin_inset Argument 1
10009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10010 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10018 \begin_layout Enumerate
10019 This is level #1, in an
10023 paragraph environment.
10024 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10028 \begin_layout Enumerate
10033 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10039 arg "depth-increment"
10043 Now, what happens if we nest an
10047 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10048 label be? An asterisk?
10052 \begin_layout Itemize
10062 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10063 So, its label is a bullet.
10064 (We got here by using
10067 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10073 arg "depth-increment"
10076 , then changing the environment to
10084 \begin_layout Itemize
10085 Here's level #4, produced using
10088 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10094 arg "depth-increment"
10098 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10103 \begin_layout Enumerate
10105 to get to level #5.
10106 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10111 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10115 , because we are in the
10123 environment (that is, it is an
10138 \begin_layout Enumerate
10143 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10144 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10148 \begin_layout Enumerate
10149 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10152 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10155 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10158 \begin_layout Enumerate
10162 arg "depth-decrement"
10165 to decrease the depth after the next
10168 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10175 \begin_layout Enumerate
10177 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10182 \begin_layout Enumerate
10184 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10185 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10189 \begin_layout Enumerate
10190 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10199 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10204 reset the counter for the label.
10208 \begin_layout Enumerate
10212 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10218 arg "depth-decrement"
10221 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10222 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10223 into the twofold-nested
10231 \begin_layout Enumerate
10232 The same thing happens if we do another
10235 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10241 arg "depth-decrement"
10244 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10247 \begin_layout Standard
10248 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10253 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10264 The number of other
10268 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10275 The same rule applies for the
10279 environment, as well.
10282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10283 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10286 \begin_layout Enumerate
10287 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10288 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10289 the same detail with how we did it.
10298 \begin_layout Standard
10306 arg "depth-increment"
10313 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10314 the example in parentheses someplace.
10315 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10316 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10317 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10321 \begin_layout Enumerate
10326 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10330 \begin_layout Verse
10331 Now we will add verse.
10332 \begin_inset Newline newline
10335 It will get much worse.
10336 \begin_inset Newline newline
10346 arg "depth-increment"
10356 \begin_layout Verse
10357 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10358 \begin_inset Newline newline
10361 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10362 \begin_inset Newline newline
10368 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10376 \begin_layout Verse
10377 Here comes a table:
10381 \begin_layout Standard
10382 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10388 \begin_layout Standard
10390 \begin_inset Tabular
10391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10392 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10479 \begin_layout Verse
10483 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10493 arg "depth-increment"
10499 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10505 \begin_inset Newline newline
10513 arg "depth-decrement"
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10525 : level #1) This is another item.
10526 Note that selecting a
10530 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10531 3 times to put the table inside the
10539 \begin_layout Quotation
10540 We're now ending the
10544 list and changing to
10549 We're still at level #1.
10550 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10551 The next set of paragraphs is a
10552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10559 We will nest both the
10566 \begin_inset space ~
10571 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10575 for the letter body.
10579 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10582 to preserve the depth.
10583 Remember that you need to use
10586 arg "newline-insert newline"
10589 to create multiple lines inside the
10596 \begin_inset space ~
10606 \begin_layout Right Address
10608 \begin_inset Newline newline
10611 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10612 \begin_inset Newline newline
10618 \begin_layout Address
10620 \begin_inset space ~
10626 \begin_layout Quotation
10627 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10631 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10632 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10633 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10634 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10635 as soon as possible.
10636 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10639 \begin_layout Quotation
10640 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10641 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10642 with your order, along with payment.
10645 \begin_layout Quotation
10646 We thank you again for your patience.
10649 \begin_layout Address
10651 \begin_inset Newline newline
10658 \begin_layout Quotation
10659 That ends that example!
10662 \begin_layout Standard
10663 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10664 gives you a lot of power with just
10666 We could have easily nested an
10687 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10690 \begin_layout Subsection
10692 \begin_inset Index idx
10695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10696 Nesting ! Separation
10702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10704 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10711 \begin_layout Standard
10712 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10714 For example you need two different enumerations:
10717 \begin_layout Enumerate
10722 \begin_layout Enumerate
10727 \begin_layout Enumerate
10731 \begin_layout Standard
10732 \begin_inset Separator plain
10738 \begin_layout Itemize
10744 \begin_layout Standard
10745 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10751 \begin_layout Enumerate
10755 \begin_layout Enumerate
10759 \begin_layout Enumerate
10763 \begin_layout Standard
10764 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10765 list item and use the menu
10767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10768 Separated <Name> Above
10772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 Separated <Name> Below
10776 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10777 ) and before or behind it the
10779 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10782 \begin_layout Standard
10783 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10784 (red arrow in LyX).
10785 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10786 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10790 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10793 arg "paragraph-break"
10800 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10803 \begin_layout Section
10804 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10805 \begin_inset Index idx
10808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10817 \begin_layout Standard
10818 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10819 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10821 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10822 be broken at the end of a line.
10823 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10827 \begin_layout Subsection
10829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10831 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10836 \begin_inset Index idx
10839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10848 \begin_layout Standard
10849 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10850 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10851 ) not to break the line at
10853 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10856 \begin_layout Quote
10857 Further documentation is given in section
10858 \begin_inset Newline newline
10862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10864 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10872 \begin_layout Standard
10873 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10888 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10897 A protected space is set with
10899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10900 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10902 \begin_inset space ~
10910 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10916 \begin_layout Subsection
10918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10920 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10925 \begin_inset Index idx
10928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10929 Spacing ! Horizontal
10937 \begin_layout Standard
10938 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10941 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10945 The length units are listed in Appendix
10946 \begin_inset space ~
10950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10952 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10959 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10963 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10968 \begin_inset Index idx
10971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10972 Spaces ! Inter-word
10980 \begin_layout Standard
10981 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10982 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10983 at the ends of sentences.
10984 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10985 automatically takes care about this.
10986 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10987 followed by a period; see section
10988 \begin_inset space ~
10992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10994 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10999 To insert a normal space, select
11001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11002 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11004 \begin_inset space ~
11012 arg "space-insert normal"
11018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11022 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11027 \begin_inset Index idx
11030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11039 \begin_layout Standard
11041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11048 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11057 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11058 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11059 inside abbreviations:
11062 \begin_layout Quote
11064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11068 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11071 \begin_layout Standard
11072 or between values and units.
11073 Compare for example this:
11074 \begin_inset Newline newline
11078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11082 \begin_inset Newline newline
11085 10 kg (normal space
11088 \begin_layout Standard
11089 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11092 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11094 \begin_inset space ~
11102 arg "space-insert thin"
11108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11112 \begin_layout Standard
11113 You can also insert the following space types:
11116 \begin_layout Description
11118 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11120 \begin_inset space ~
11126 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11130 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11134 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11138 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11140 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11143 space between the arrows.
11144 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11148 \begin_layout Description
11150 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11152 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11156 \begin_inset space ~
11159 space A line with a
11160 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11164 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11168 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11172 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11174 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11177 space between the arrows.
11180 \begin_layout Description
11182 \begin_inset space ~
11186 \begin_inset space ~
11189 space A line with a
11190 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11194 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11198 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11201 negative thin space between the arrows.
11204 \begin_layout Description
11206 \begin_inset space ~
11210 \begin_inset space ~
11213 space A line with a
11214 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11218 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11222 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11225 negative medium space between the arrows.
11228 \begin_layout Description
11230 \begin_inset space ~
11234 \begin_inset space ~
11237 space A line with a
11238 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11242 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11246 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11249 negative thick space between the arrows.
11252 \begin_layout Description
11254 \begin_inset space ~
11258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11262 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11266 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11270 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11274 \begin_inset space ~
11278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11281 em) space between the arrows.
11284 \begin_layout Description
11286 \begin_inset space ~
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11294 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11298 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11302 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11306 \begin_inset space ~
11310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11313 em) space between the arrows.
11316 \begin_layout Description
11318 \begin_inset space ~
11322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11330 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11334 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11338 \begin_inset space ~
11342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11345 em) space between the arrows.
11348 \begin_layout Description
11350 \begin_inset space ~
11354 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11358 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11363 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 cm space between the arrows.
11373 \begin_layout Standard
11375 \begin_inset space ~
11379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11381 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11385 lists the different space sizes.
11388 \begin_layout Standard
11389 \begin_inset Float table
11396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11397 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11402 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11406 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11416 \begin_inset Tabular
11417 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11418 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11420 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11517 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11523 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11534 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11545 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11551 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11562 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11592 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11751 \begin_inset Index idx
11754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11763 \begin_layout Standard
11764 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11765 feature for adding extra space
11766 in a uniform fashion.
11767 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11768 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11769 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11770 equally between themselves.
11773 \begin_layout Standard
11774 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11777 \begin_layout Quote
11779 This is on the left side
11780 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11783 This is on the right
11786 \begin_layout Quote
11789 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11793 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11799 \begin_layout Quote
11802 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11806 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11810 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11816 \begin_layout Standard
11817 That was an example in the
11823 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11827 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11831 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11834 is one in a standard paragraph.
11835 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11839 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11842 \begin_layout Standard
11843 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11846 \begin_inset space ~
11851 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11854 \begin_layout Standard
11856 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11860 \begin_inset space ~
11866 \begin_layout Standard
11868 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11872 \begin_inset space ~
11878 \begin_layout Standard
11880 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11884 \begin_inset space ~
11890 \begin_layout Standard
11892 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11896 \begin_inset space ~
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11904 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
11906 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
11910 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
11911 (= opened downwards)
11914 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11918 \begin_inset space ~
11924 \begin_layout Standard
11926 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
11928 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
11932 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
11936 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11940 \begin_inset space ~
11946 \begin_layout Standard
11947 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11955 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11959 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11961 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11962 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11966 option in the space dialog.
11974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11978 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11983 \begin_inset Index idx
11986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11995 \begin_layout Standard
11996 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11997 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12000 \begin_layout Standard
12001 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12004 What is correct English?:
12005 \begin_inset Newline newline
12009 \begin_inset Newline newline
12013 \begin_inset space ~
12016 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12017 \begin_inset Newline newline
12021 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12032 \begin_inset Newline newline
12036 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12047 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12060 \begin_inset space ~
12064 \begin_inset space ~
12068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12072 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12074 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12075 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12079 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12085 \begin_inset space ~
12089 \begin_inset space ~
12093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12096 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12105 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12106 That is why it is named
12107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12115 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12116 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12120 \begin_layout Subsection
12122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12124 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12129 \begin_inset Index idx
12132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12141 \begin_layout Standard
12142 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12145 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12147 \begin_inset space ~
12153 There you find the following sizes:
12156 \begin_layout Standard
12169 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12170 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12175 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12177 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12178 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 \begin_inset space ~
12186 \begin_inset Index idx
12189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12190 Document ! Settings
12195 for the paragraph separation.
12196 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12205 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12209 \begin_layout Standard
12211 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12220 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12221 size including line spacing.
12226 \begin_layout Standard
12232 \begin_inset Index idx
12235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12241 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12242 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12247 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12248 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12257 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12266 s are described in section
12267 \begin_inset space ~
12271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12273 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12282 If there are several
12286 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12287 You can therefore use
12291 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12294 \begin_layout Standard
12299 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12300 \begin_inset space ~
12304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12306 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12313 \begin_layout Standard
12314 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12324 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12325 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12337 \begin_layout Subsection
12338 Paragraph Alignment
12339 \begin_inset Index idx
12342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12343 Paragraph ! Alignment
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12352 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12354 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 dialog (toolbar button
12360 arg "layout-paragraph"
12364 There are five possibilities:
12367 \begin_layout Itemize
12375 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12381 \begin_layout Itemize
12389 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12395 \begin_layout Itemize
12403 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12409 \begin_layout Itemize
12417 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12423 \begin_layout Itemize
12431 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12437 \begin_layout Standard
12438 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12439 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12440 the left and right margins.
12441 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12444 \begin_layout Standard
12446 This paragraph is right aligned,
12449 \begin_layout Standard
12451 this one is centered,
12454 \begin_layout Standard
12456 this one is left aligned.
12459 \begin_layout Subsection
12461 \begin_inset Index idx
12464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12465 Page breaks ! Forced
12471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12473 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12480 \begin_layout Standard
12481 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12482 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12483 force a page break where you want one.
12484 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12485 is good at page breaking.
12486 Only if you use a lot of
12490 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12491 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12494 \begin_layout Standard
12495 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12496 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12500 have to change the page breaking.
12503 \begin_layout Standard
12504 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12506 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12509 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12511 \begin_inset space ~
12517 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12520 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12522 \begin_inset space ~
12527 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12529 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12530 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12533 \begin_layout Standard
12534 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12535 at the top of a page.
12536 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12538 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12539 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12540 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12544 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12548 to learn more about
12555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12559 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12564 \begin_inset Index idx
12567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12568 Page breaks ! Clear
12576 \begin_layout Standard
12577 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12578 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12579 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12580 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12581 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12588 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12590 \begin_inset space ~
12596 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12599 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12601 \begin_inset space ~
12605 \begin_inset space ~
12610 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12611 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12614 \begin_layout Subsection
12616 \begin_inset Index idx
12619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12628 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12635 \begin_layout Standard
12636 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12638 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12641 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset space ~
12655 arg "newline-insert newline"
12659 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12664 \begin_inset space ~
12668 \begin_inset space ~
12676 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12679 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12681 This is useful to avoid
12682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12689 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12692 \begin_layout Standard
12693 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12694 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12696 very good at line breaking.
12697 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12698 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12699 \begin_inset space ~
12703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12705 reference "sec:Quote"
12710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12712 reference "sec:Verse"
12717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12719 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12726 \begin_layout Subsection
12728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12730 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12735 \begin_inset Index idx
12738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 \begin_layout Standard
12749 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12760 \begin_layout Standard
12764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12765 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12767 \begin_inset space ~
12772 you can insert horizontal lines.
12773 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12774 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12775 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12778 \begin_layout Standard
12780 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12791 \begin_layout Section
12792 Characters and Symbols
12795 \begin_layout Standard
12796 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12797 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12798 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12806 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12810 for information on how this is done.
12813 \begin_layout Standard
12814 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12819 dialog via the menu
12821 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12822 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12828 \begin_layout Standard
12829 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12837 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12838 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12840 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12848 \begin_layout Section
12849 Fonts and Text Styles
12850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12852 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12859 \begin_layout Subsection
12861 \begin_inset Index idx
12864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12873 \begin_layout Standard
12874 There are two types of fonts:
12877 \begin_layout Description
12879 \begin_inset space ~
12883 \begin_inset Index idx
12886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12892 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12897 characters) in the font.
12898 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12899 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12900 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12901 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12902 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12903 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12904 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12905 \begin_inset Newline newline
12908 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12909 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12910 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12911 sizes than at small ones.
12912 \begin_inset Newline newline
12926 \begin_inset space ~
12934 \begin_layout Description
12936 \begin_inset space ~
12940 \begin_inset Index idx
12943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12949 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12950 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12951 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12952 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12953 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12954 image manipulation program.
12955 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12956 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12957 \begin_inset space ~
12960 pixels high up to 34
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12964 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12965 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12966 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12968 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12969 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12970 \begin_inset Newline newline
12973 Bitmap fonts are named
12976 \begin_inset space ~
12981 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12984 \begin_layout Standard
12985 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12986 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12987 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12988 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12989 use scalable fonts.
12992 \begin_layout Standard
12993 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12996 \begin_layout Standard
12997 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12999 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13001 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
13004 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13005 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13006 font to emphasize text, you use an
13007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13015 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13017 In \SpecialChar LyX
13018 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13022 \begin_layout Subsection
13025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13027 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13034 \begin_layout Standard
13035 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13036 used its own fonts.
13037 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13038 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13041 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13042 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13043 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13044 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13045 to a word processor.
13046 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13047 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13048 files are very portable across
13049 different machines.
13050 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13051 has increased a lot
13052 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13055 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13057 \begin_inset space ~
13061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13063 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13068 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13069 code in the document
13070 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13073 \begin_layout Standard
13074 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13075 engines that are also able directly
13076 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13078 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13080 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13082 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13083 that is installed on your system.
13084 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13087 \begin_layout Standard
13088 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13096 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13097 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13105 \begin_layout Subsection
13106 Document Font and Font size
13107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13109 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13114 \begin_inset Index idx
13117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13124 \begin_inset Index idx
13127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13136 \begin_layout Standard
13137 You can set the document fonts in the
13139 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13143 \begin_inset Index idx
13146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13147 Document ! Settings
13157 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13158 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13161 \begin_inset space ~
13170 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13175 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13178 \begin_layout Standard
13183 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13184 This requires that you use
13196 as the output format, i.
13197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13201 \begin_inset space \space{}
13204 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13205 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13206 installed (see section
13207 \begin_inset space ~
13211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13213 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13218 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13220 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13221 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13226 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13227 cannot determine the family.
13228 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13229 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13232 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13235 \begin_layout Standard
13236 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13237 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13242 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13248 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13250 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13252 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13255 font encoding, this is
13256 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13257 , depending on the document language,
13260 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13261 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13269 \begin_inset space ~
13275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13285 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13286 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13308 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13329 European Computer Modern
13332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13340 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13343 \begin_layout Standard
13348 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13349 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13354 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13357 \begin_inset space ~
13362 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13368 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13369 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13372 \begin_layout Itemize
13376 \begin_inset space ~
13381 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13399 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13400 community in order to replace
13404 as the default font.
13405 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13406 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13409 \begin_inset space ~
13422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13423 One difference is improved kerning.
13431 \begin_layout Itemize
13432 If you do not like the look of
13440 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13445 \begin_inset space ~
13451 \begin_inset space ~
13461 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13465 serif and typewriter fonts,
13469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13470 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13477 \begin_inset space ~
13486 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13491 \begin_inset space \space{}
13499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13503 \begin_inset space \space{}
13509 \begin_inset space ~
13517 \begin_inset space ~
13527 but you can also select your own.
13528 \begin_inset Newline newline
13531 The differences between roman,
13534 \begin_inset space ~
13543 fonts are explained in section
13544 \begin_inset space ~
13548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13550 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13555 \begin_inset Newline newline
13561 \begin_inset space ~
13566 was originally designed for newspapers.
13567 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13568 into the small newspaper columns.
13572 \begin_inset space ~
13577 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13580 \begin_layout Standard
13581 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13594 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13599 depends on the class you are using.
13600 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13603 \begin_layout Standard
13604 Note that the font size is the
13609 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13610 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13611 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13612 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13621 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13628 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13635 \begin_layout Standard
13639 \begin_inset space ~
13644 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13649 serif or typewriter.
13654 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13664 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13667 \begin_layout Standard
13672 LaTeX font encoding
13674 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13675 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13681 \begin_inset Index idx
13684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13692 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13694 \begin_inset space ~
13698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13700 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13707 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13708 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13709 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13713 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13721 \begin_layout Standard
13722 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13724 Use Old Style Figures
13728 Use True Small Caps
13731 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13734 Use Old Style Figures
13736 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13738 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13746 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13750 Use True Small Caps
13752 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13753 of scaled capitals.
13754 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13755 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13756 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13760 \begin_layout Standard
13762 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13763 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13764 provided by the font package (or the
13768 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13773 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13779 \begin_layout Standard
13784 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13785 a font to display the script characters.
13789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13790 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13796 \begin_inset Index idx
13799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13806 So this has no effect for the document language
13822 \begin_layout Standard
13825 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13827 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13828 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13834 \begin_inset Index idx
13837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13839 packages ! microtype
13848 \begin_layout Standard
13851 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13853 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13858 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13859 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13865 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13866 \begin_inset space ~
13870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13872 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13887 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13895 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13900 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13901 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13903 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13905 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13908 dialog, see section
13909 \begin_inset space ~
13913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13915 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13927 \begin_layout Subsection
13931 \begin_layout Standard
13932 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13933 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13935 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13936 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13937 choose a math font in the dialog
13939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13943 \begin_inset Index idx
13946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13947 Document ! Settings
13953 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13954 automatically selects a math font.
13955 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13956 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13965 \begin_inset space ~
13971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13976 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13977 document font is available.
13980 \begin_layout Standard
13981 Note that the math font will not be used for
13985 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13991 or by the insertion of the command
13998 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13999 \begin_inset space ~
14003 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14004 while the math characters do not.
14006 \begin_inset space ~
14009 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14012 \begin_inset space ~
14020 \begin_inset space ~
14025 in the document font settings.
14028 \begin_layout Standard
14029 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14030 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14031 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14032 font (in most cases
14033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14039 \begin_inset space ~
14045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14048 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14049 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14057 \begin_inset space ~
14063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14069 \begin_layout Subsection
14071 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14077 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14081 name "subsec:charstyles"
14088 \begin_inset Index idx
14091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14098 \begin_inset Index idx
14101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14110 \begin_layout Standard
14111 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14112 automatically changes the
14113 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14116 style for certain paragraph environments.
14118 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14119 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14121 This is where we meet the concept of
14127 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14129 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14133 \begin_layout Standard
14135 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14140 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14142 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14155 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14164 e., available with all document classes.
14165 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14169 for specific purposes.
14170 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14173 \begin_layout Standard
14175 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14176 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14186 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14190 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14203 — you customized the
14208 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14209 among them, encourage the use of
14221 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14222 \begin_inset space ~
14226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14228 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14233 Rather than fiddling with
14237 , they encourage the use of
14241 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14246 \begin_inset Quotes els
14250 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14253 ), not their form (
14254 \begin_inset Quotes els
14258 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14262 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14263 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14264 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14265 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14266 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14267 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14273 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14277 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14278 With a semantic markup (such as
14282 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14287 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14289 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14290 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14293 \begin_layout Standard
14295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14296 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14297 by \SpecialChar LyX
14303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14306 Builtin Text Styles
14307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14309 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14316 \begin_layout Standard
14318 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14319 The two builtin text styles can be
14320 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14324 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14328 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14329 both of these styles
14332 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14340 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14346 \begin_layout Standard
14351 style, do one of the following:
14354 \begin_layout Itemize
14355 click on the toolbar button
14364 \begin_layout Itemize
14365 use the key binding
14372 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14376 \begin_layout Itemize
14378 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14386 arg "dialog-show character"
14392 arg "dialog-show character"
14395 ) as described in section
14396 \begin_inset space ~
14400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14402 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14411 \begin_layout Standard
14412 These commands are all toggles.
14417 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14420 \begin_layout Standard
14421 One typically uses the
14425 style for proper names.
14427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14434 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14444 \begin_layout Standard
14446 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14451 is producing text in
14455 , but the definition can be changed.
14460 \begin_layout Standard
14462 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14464 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14472 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14479 \begin_layout Itemize
14480 clicking on the toolbar button
14489 \begin_layout Itemize
14490 using the keybindings
14497 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14501 \begin_layout Itemize
14503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14511 arg "dialog-show character"
14517 arg "dialog-show character"
14520 ) as described in section
14521 \begin_inset space ~
14525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14527 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14536 \begin_layout Standard
14541 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14543 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14545 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14548 packages use a different font
14549 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14550 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14556 \begin_layout Standard
14557 We've been using the
14561 style all over the place in this document.
14562 Here's one more example:
14565 \begin_layout Quotation
14569 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14571 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14577 \begin_layout Standard
14578 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14579 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14580 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14581 the common tendency to overuse
14582 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14589 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14593 \begin_layout Standard
14595 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14596 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14597 only as font changes and integrated in the
14605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14608 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14615 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14617 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14621 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14624 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14626 \begin_inset space ~
14629 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14631 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14637 arg "dialog-show character"
14643 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14645 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14651 arg "dialog-show character"
14655 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14659 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14661 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14665 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14672 \begin_layout Standard
14674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14675 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14677 \begin_inset space ~
14681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14683 reference "subsec:Modules"
14690 ), or local layout settings (see section
14691 \begin_inset space ~
14695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14697 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14702 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14706 markup for specific functions.
14707 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14712 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14722 \begin_inset Quotes els
14726 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14732 \begin_layout Standard
14734 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14735 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14737 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14743 \begin_layout Standard
14745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14746 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14751 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14752 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14753 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14758 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14759 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14772 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14773 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14774 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14775 \begin_inset Flex Code
14778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14780 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14789 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14794 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14803 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14808 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14817 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14818 on screen their formal appearance.
14823 \begin_layout Subsection
14825 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14827 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14831 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14837 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14839 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14845 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14847 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14853 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14858 \begin_inset Index idx
14861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14870 \begin_layout Standard
14871 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14875 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14877 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14884 the properties of text passages
14885 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14889 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14890 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14891 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14892 from ordinary dialog.
14893 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14897 \begin_layout Standard
14899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14900 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14901 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14902 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14903 the properties of the respective text passages.
14908 comes in as a last resort.
14913 \begin_layout Standard
14914 Before we document how to
14915 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14916 use custom character style
14917 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14918 tweak the text properties
14920 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14921 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14923 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14927 \begin_inset Newline newline
14930 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14931 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14934 \begin_layout Standard
14936 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14937 use custom character styles
14938 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14939 tweak text properties
14942 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14945 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14947 \begin_inset space ~
14950 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14952 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14958 arg "dialog-show character"
14963 dialog or press the toolbar button
14966 arg "dialog-show character"
14971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14974 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14975 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14980 property that you can choose.
14981 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14984 \begin_inset space ~
14989 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14991 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14995 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14997 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15002 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15003 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15004 environments all at once.
15007 \begin_layout Standard
15009 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15011 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15014 properties, and their options (in addition to
15017 \begin_inset space ~
15023 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15027 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15035 \begin_layout Labeling
15036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15050 The possible options are:
15054 \begin_layout Labeling
15055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15060 This is the Roman font family.
15061 Normally a serif font.
15062 It's also the default family.
15072 \begin_layout Labeling
15073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15077 \begin_inset space ~
15084 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15096 \begin_layout Labeling
15097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15104 This is the Typewriter font family.
15110 arg "font-typewriter"
15116 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15120 \begin_layout Standard
15122 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15123 The general differences of these families are:
15126 \begin_layout Itemize
15128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15133 fonts use characters with serifs.
15134 These are the small
15135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15142 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15143 The following example shows the difference:
15144 \begin_inset Newline newline
15148 \begin_inset Newline newline
15153 text without serifs
15156 \begin_inset Newline newline
15159 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15160 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15167 \begin_layout Itemize
15169 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15174 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15175 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15176 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15179 \begin_layout Itemize
15181 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15194 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15212 \begin_inset Newline newline
15216 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15221 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15234 \begin_inset Note Note
15237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15239 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15240 For more on phantoms see section
15241 \begin_inset space ~
15245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15247 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15257 \begin_inset Newline newline
15266 \begin_layout Labeling
15267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15272 This corresponds to the print weight.
15277 \begin_layout Labeling
15278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15283 This is the Medium font series.
15284 It's also the default series.
15287 \begin_layout Labeling
15288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15295 This is the Bold font series.
15308 \begin_layout Labeling
15309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15314 As the name implies.
15319 \begin_layout Labeling
15320 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15325 This is the Upright font shape.
15326 It's also the default shape.
15329 \begin_layout Labeling
15330 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15340 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15350 s the Italic font shape
15356 \begin_layout Labeling
15357 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15364 This is the Slanted font shape
15366 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15367 , this is different from italic).
15370 \begin_layout Labeling
15371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15375 \begin_inset space ~
15382 This is the Small caps font shape
15389 \begin_layout Labeling
15390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15395 Alters the text color.
15396 Note that not all DVI
15397 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15399 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15402 viewers are able to display colors.
15404 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15408 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15410 \begin_inset space ~
15417 , which means that the document default color set in
15419 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15420 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15426 \begin_inset space ~
15432 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15434 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15438 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15518 \begin_inset Index idx
15521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15530 \begin_layout Labeling
15531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15536 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15537 the language of the document.
15538 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15539 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15540 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15543 in blue to indicate the change
15544 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15545 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15549 \begin_inset Newline newline
15552 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15554 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15555 When using the spell checking (see section
15556 \begin_inset space ~
15560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15562 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15566 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15567 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15569 \begin_inset Newline newline
15572 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15574 Exclude from Spellchecking
15577 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15580 \begin_layout Labeling
15581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15586 Alters the size of the font.
15588 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15590 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15594 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15597 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15598 document font size.
15599 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15600 the details, but a general description of what
15606 \begin_layout Labeling
15607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15628 arg "font-size tiny"
15634 \begin_layout Labeling
15635 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15656 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15662 \begin_layout Labeling
15663 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15684 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15690 \begin_layout Labeling
15691 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15712 arg "font-size small"
15718 \begin_layout Labeling
15719 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15733 It's also the default size.
15737 arg "font-size normal"
15743 \begin_layout Labeling
15744 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15765 arg "font-size large"
15771 \begin_layout Labeling
15772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15793 arg "font-size larger"
15799 \begin_layout Labeling
15800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15821 arg "font-size largest"
15827 \begin_layout Labeling
15828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15849 arg "font-size huge"
15855 \begin_layout Labeling
15856 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15877 arg "font-size giant"
15883 \begin_layout Labeling
15884 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15889 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15909 arg "font-size increase"
15915 \begin_layout Labeling
15916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15921 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15941 arg "font-size decrease"
15948 \begin_layout Standard
15953 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15954 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15956 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15957 — use those instead.
15958 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15961 \begin_layout Labeling
15962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15964 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15968 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15974 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15975 change a few other things at the character level
15976 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15977 have text passages being underlined
15981 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15982 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15983 days, when you could not change fonts.
15984 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15985 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15986 because some people
15990 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15997 \begin_layout Labeling
15998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16000 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16007 This is text with emphasize on
16010 This might seem like the same as
16014 , but it is actually a bit different.
16020 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16022 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16023 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16027 \begin_layout Labeling
16028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16030 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16035 Don't use underlining.
16040 \begin_layout Labeling
16041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16043 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16047 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16055 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16057 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16066 arg "font-underline"
16072 \begin_inset Newline newline
16076 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16079 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16080 when you could not change fonts.
16081 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16082 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16083 because some people
16087 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16092 \begin_layout Labeling
16093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16097 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16099 \begin_inset space ~
16108 This is text with Double under
16109 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16111 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16120 arg "font-underunderline"
16124 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16126 \begin_inset Newline newline
16129 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16130 about double underbar
16135 \begin_layout Labeling
16136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16140 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16142 \begin_inset space ~
16151 This is text with Wavy under
16152 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16163 arg "font-underwave"
16167 \begin_inset Newline newline
16170 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16171 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16172 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16177 \begin_layout Labeling
16178 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16180 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16185 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16191 \begin_layout Labeling
16192 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16194 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16199 Don't use strikethrough.
16202 \begin_layout Labeling
16203 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16207 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16209 \begin_inset space ~
16213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16221 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16223 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16224 Single strikethrough
16232 arg "font-strikeout"
16236 \begin_inset Newline newline
16239 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16240 changed in the meantime.
16243 \begin_layout Labeling
16244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16246 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16250 \begin_inset space ~
16254 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16256 \begin_inset space ~
16260 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16268 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16270 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16276 \begin_inset Newline newline
16279 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16283 \begin_layout Standard
16285 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16286 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16287 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16288 \begin_inset space ~
16292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16294 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16301 \begin_layout Itemize
16303 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16310 This is text with emphasize on
16315 \begin_layout Itemize
16319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16326 This is text with Noun on.
16328 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16335 , this is a logical attribute.
16336 Normally it's equivalent to
16339 \begin_inset space ~
16349 \begin_layout Standard
16350 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16351 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16353 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16358 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16359 chosen a new character style
16360 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16361 applied a text property
16364 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16367 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16369 \begin_inset space ~
16372 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16374 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16380 arg "dialog-show character"
16388 arg "dialog-show character"
16391 ) dialog, the settings are
16392 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16396 You can activate the
16397 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16399 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16400 last applied properties
16402 by using the toolbar button
16405 arg "textstyle-apply"
16409 The button lets you apply
16410 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16411 your custom character style
16412 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16415 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16417 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16418 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16419 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16420 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16425 \begin_layout Standard
16426 To completely reset the
16427 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16429 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16430 text properties of a selection
16432 to the default, use
16433 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16435 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16445 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16450 from the menu of the toolbar button
16453 arg "textstyle-apply"
16460 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16461 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16462 you just set the shape to
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16481 \begin_inset space ~
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16497 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16498 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16506 \begin_inset space ~
16518 \begin_layout Itemize
16520 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16533 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16551 \begin_inset Newline newline
16555 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16569 \begin_inset Note Note
16572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16573 For more on phantoms see section
16574 \begin_inset space ~
16578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16580 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16590 \begin_inset Newline newline
16596 \begin_layout Itemize
16598 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16603 fonts use characters with serifs.
16604 These are the small
16605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16612 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16613 The following example shows the difference:
16614 \begin_inset Newline newline
16618 \begin_inset Newline newline
16623 text without serifs
16626 \begin_inset Newline newline
16629 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16630 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16637 \begin_layout Itemize
16639 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16644 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16645 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16646 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16651 \begin_layout Standard
16653 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16661 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16662 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16665 \begin_inset space ~
16670 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16671 the property to be removed.
16672 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16673 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16674 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16692 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16693 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16701 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16705 \begin_inset space ~
16710 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16721 If you, for example, set
16722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16740 \begin_inset space ~
16745 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16754 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16759 \begin_layout Standard
16761 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16764 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16765 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16768 \begin_layout Section
16769 Printing and Previewing
16772 \begin_layout Subsection
16776 \begin_layout Standard
16777 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16778 using \SpecialChar LyX
16779 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16780 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16781 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16782 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16784 Additional Features
16789 \begin_layout Standard
16791 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16794 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16795 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16796 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16799 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16800 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16801 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16802 to turn your writing into printable output.
16803 This happens in two stages:
16806 \begin_layout Enumerate
16807 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16808 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16810 a file with the extension,
16811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16825 \begin_layout Enumerate
16826 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16827 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16828 to use the commands in the
16832 file to produce printable output.
16835 \begin_layout Subsection
16836 Output file formats
16837 \begin_inset Index idx
16840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16849 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16857 Simple text (ASCII)
16858 \begin_inset Index idx
16861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16862 File formats ! ASCII
16870 \begin_layout Standard
16871 This file type has the extension
16872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16884 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16888 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16895 \begin_layout Standard
16896 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16898 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16899 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16901 \begin_inset space ~
16907 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16908 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16909 bibliography (section
16910 \begin_inset space ~
16914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16916 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16921 If your document includes such material, use
16923 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16924 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16926 \begin_inset space ~
16930 \begin_inset space ~
16934 \begin_inset space ~
16942 \begin_inset space ~
16946 \begin_inset space ~
16952 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16953 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16956 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16959 \begin_inset Index idx
16962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16963 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16972 \begin_layout Standard
16973 This file type has the extension
16974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16985 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16988 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16989 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16990 -Errors or to process it manually
16991 with console commands.
16992 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16993 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16994 's temporary directory whenever you
16995 view or export your document.
16998 \begin_layout Standard
16999 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17000 -file using the menu
17002 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17003 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17007 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17008 export variants are explained in section
17009 \begin_inset space ~
17013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17015 reference "subsec:Export"
17022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17024 \begin_inset Index idx
17027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17036 \begin_layout Standard
17037 This file type has the extension
17038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17058 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17059 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17060 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17064 \begin_layout Standard
17065 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17066 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17067 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17068 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17069 when you view the DVI.
17070 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17073 \begin_layout Standard
17074 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17076 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17077 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17082 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17083 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17085 \begin_inset space ~
17091 The latter option uses the program
17093 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17099 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17102 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17103 font access (see section
17104 \begin_inset space ~
17108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17110 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17115 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17116 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17123 \begin_inset Index idx
17126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17127 File formats ! PostScript
17135 \begin_layout Standard
17136 This file type has the extension
17137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17149 PostScript was developed by the company
17153 as a printer language.
17154 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17156 PostScript can be seen as a
17157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17160 programming language
17161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17164 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17169 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17176 \begin_inset Index idx
17179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17181 packages ! pstricks
17191 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17194 \begin_layout Standard
17195 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17199 Encapsulated PostScript
17200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17203 (EPS, file extension
17204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17216 As \SpecialChar LyX
17217 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17218 convert them in the background to EPS.
17219 If, for example, you have 50
17220 \begin_inset space ~
17223 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17225 \begin_inset space ~
17228 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17229 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17231 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17232 EPS to avoid this problem.
17235 \begin_layout Standard
17236 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17238 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17239 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17245 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17247 \begin_inset Index idx
17250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17257 \begin_inset Index idx
17260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17269 \begin_layout Standard
17270 This file type has the extension
17271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17287 Portable Document Format
17288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17295 was derived from PostScript.
17296 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17305 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17306 looks exactly the same.
17309 \begin_layout Standard
17310 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17314 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17318 (JPG, file extension
17319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17346 Portable Network Graphics
17347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17350 (PNG, file extension
17351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17363 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17364 converts them in the
17365 background to one of these formats.
17366 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17367 will slow down your workflow.
17368 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17371 \begin_layout Standard
17372 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17374 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17380 \begin_layout Description
17382 \begin_inset space ~
17385 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17389 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17392 \begin_layout Description
17394 \begin_inset space ~
17401 ) This uses the program
17403 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17406 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17409 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17412 is a new engine, derived from
17416 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17417 access (see section
17418 \begin_inset space ~
17422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17424 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17429 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17430 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17435 \begin_layout Description
17437 \begin_inset space ~
17444 ) This uses the program
17449 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17455 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17456 font access (see section
17457 \begin_inset space ~
17461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17463 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17468 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17469 vertically written Japanese.
17472 \begin_layout Description
17474 \begin_inset space ~
17477 (cropped) This is the same as
17480 \begin_inset space ~
17485 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17486 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17487 to generate good-looking
17488 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17491 \begin_layout Description
17493 \begin_inset space ~
17496 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17500 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17504 \begin_layout Description
17506 \begin_inset space ~
17509 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17513 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17514 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17518 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17519 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17522 \begin_layout Standard
17526 \begin_inset space ~
17535 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17536 works without problems.
17537 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17538 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17542 \begin_inset space ~
17550 \begin_inset space ~
17555 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17563 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17565 \begin_inset Index idx
17568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17569 FileFormats ! XHTML
17575 \begin_inset Index idx
17578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17587 \begin_layout Standard
17588 This file type has the extension
17589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17601 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17602 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17603 When \SpecialChar LyX
17604 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17605 suitable for the purpose.
17606 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17608 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17609 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17612 between different formats, which are described in section
17614 Math Output in XHTML
17619 \begin_inset space ~
17627 \begin_layout Standard
17628 XHTML output remains
17629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17636 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17637 features are supported yet.
17641 and the World Wide Web
17645 Additional Features
17647 manual, for more information.
17650 \begin_layout Standard
17651 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17653 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17654 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17660 \begin_layout Subsection
17662 \begin_inset Index idx
17665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17674 \begin_layout Standard
17675 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17676 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17685 or use the toolbar button
17692 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17693 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17700 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17704 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17706 \begin_inset space ~
17710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17712 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17717 Further output formats can be selected via
17719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17720 View (Other Formats)
17722 or the toolbar button
17731 \begin_layout Standard
17732 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17733 viewer window using the menu
17735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17740 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17741 Update (Other Formats)
17746 \begin_layout Standard
17747 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17750 To have a real output, export your document.
17753 \begin_layout Section
17754 A few Words about Typography
17755 \begin_inset Index idx
17758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17767 \begin_layout Subsection
17768 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17769 \begin_inset Index idx
17772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 \begin_inset Index idx
17782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17791 \begin_layout Standard
17792 In \SpecialChar LyX
17794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17805 symbol comes in four variants: the
17822 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17828 \begin_layout Standard
17829 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17839 height_special "totalheight"
17844 backgroundcolor "none"
17847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17848 \begin_inset Tabular
17849 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17850 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17851 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17852 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17853 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17854 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17855 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17883 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17923 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17924 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17946 system key combination
17950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17951 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17963 and the em dash with
17966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17979 is the Mac label for the right
17990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18003 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18026 system key combination or
18027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18041 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18054 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18093 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18099 \begin_layout Standard
18100 Dashes can also be inserted with
18102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18104 \begin_inset space ~
18107 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18115 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18116 and 2014 for the en dash).
18119 \begin_layout Standard
18120 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18121 mode and has a length of its own.
18122 Here are some examples:
18125 \begin_layout Enumerate
18126 line- and page-breaks
18127 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18137 \begin_layout Enumerate
18139 \begin_inset space ~
18143 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18153 \begin_layout Enumerate
18154 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18155 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18165 \begin_layout Enumerate
18166 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18170 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18180 \begin_layout Standard
18182 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18184 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18185 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18193 \begin_layout Subsection
18194 Dashes and Line Breaks
18195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18197 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18204 \begin_layout Standard
18205 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18206 case and locale, e.
18207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18213 \begin_layout Itemize
18214 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18215 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18218 \begin_layout Itemize
18219 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18223 \begin_layout Itemize
18224 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18225 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18228 \begin_layout Standard
18229 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18230 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18241 allows line breaks after hyphens
18242 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18244 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18247 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18250 \begin_layout Enumerate
18251 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18252 \begin_inset space ~
18255 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18257 The Elements of Typographic Style
18260 \begin_inset space ~
18263 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18266 \begin_layout Enumerate
18267 Unwanted line breaks
18272 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18274 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18277 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18284 Prevent Hyphenation
18289 \begin_inset space ~
18305 in \SpecialChar TeX
18307 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18308 , a protected space does not suffice
18312 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18319 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18320 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18321 in the document language.
18322 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18336 \begin_layout Itemize
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18342 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18352 height_special "totalheight"
18357 backgroundcolor "none"
18360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18369 \begin_layout Itemize
18371 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18381 height_special "totalheight"
18386 backgroundcolor "none"
18389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 \begin_inset space ~
18399 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18400 \begin_inset space ~
18403 – sont très utiles.
18406 \begin_layout Itemize
18411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18420 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18424 \begin_layout Standard
18425 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18426 \begin_inset space ~
18429 – in contrast to an overfull line
18430 \begin_inset space ~
18433 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18437 \begin_layout Standard
18438 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18442 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18443 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18444 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18449 \begin_layout Enumerate
18450 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18451 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18452 or \SpecialChar TeX
18458 \begin_layout Itemize
18460 \begin_inset space ~
18463 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18464 \begin_inset space ~
18467 – sont très utiles.
18471 \begin_layout Enumerate
18472 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18473 \begin_inset Newline newline
18478 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18479 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18481 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18483 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18485 \begin_inset space ~
18491 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18493 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18495 \begin_inset space ~
18506 \begin_layout Itemize
18507 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18508 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18509 should be followed by
18510 a line break opportunity.
18513 \begin_layout Standard
18514 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18515 \begin_inset space ~
18519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18521 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18532 \begin_layout Enumerate
18533 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18534 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18535 or en dashes (see section
18536 \begin_inset space ~
18540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18542 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18552 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18553 Changes and backwards compatibility
18556 \begin_layout Standard
18557 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18559 \begin_inset space ~
18562 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18563 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18572 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18573 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18581 \begin_layout Standard
18582 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18584 \begin_inset space ~
18587 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18589 prevents ligation to dashes.
18591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18598 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18603 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18604 after the input (unless the current text font is
18612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18613 The behavior was changed since
18614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18629 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18630 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18631 as non-breakable dashes.
18632 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18641 \begin_layout Standard
18644 \begin_inset space ~
18652 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18654 \begin_inset space ~
18657 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18661 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18662 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18663 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18665 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18669 If you used both literal and
18670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18677 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18679 \begin_inset space ~
18682 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18683 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18686 \begin_layout Subsection
18688 \begin_inset Index idx
18691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18700 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18707 \begin_layout Standard
18708 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18709 but automatically in the output.
18710 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18716 \begin_inset Index idx
18719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18726 following the rules of the document language.
18728 does not hyphenate text in the
18732 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18735 \begin_layout Standard
18737 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18741 font and with unusual constructs, like
18742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18750 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18751 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18752 This is done with the menu
18754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18755 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18757 \begin_inset space ~
18763 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18765 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18769 \begin_layout Standard
18770 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18771 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18782 would then see the hyphen
18783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18790 as a line break possibility.
18791 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18792 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18796 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18799 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18801 Prevent Hyphenation
18806 \begin_inset space ~
18814 \begin_layout Subsection
18816 \begin_inset Index idx
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18829 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18832 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18839 \begin_layout Standard
18840 When \SpecialChar LyX
18841 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18842 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18844 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18850 appropriate amount of space.
18851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18854 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18856 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18857 gets after another word.
18860 \begin_layout Standard
18861 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18862 not work in all cases.
18864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18875 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18876 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18879 \begin_layout Standard
18880 Here are some examples of
18884 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18887 \begin_layout Itemize
18892 \begin_layout Itemize
18897 \begin_layout Standard
18898 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18901 \begin_layout Itemize
18903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18907 this is too much space!
18910 \begin_layout Itemize
18915 \begin_layout Standard
18916 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18919 \begin_layout Standard
18920 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18923 \begin_layout Enumerate
18927 \begin_inset space ~
18932 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18933 \begin_inset space ~
18937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18939 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18944 \begin_inset Index idx
18947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18948 Spaces ! inter-word
18956 \begin_layout Enumerate
18960 \begin_inset space ~
18965 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18966 \begin_inset space ~
18970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18972 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18977 \begin_inset Index idx
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18989 \begin_layout Enumerate
18993 \begin_inset space ~
18997 \begin_inset space ~
19001 \begin_inset space ~
19008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19010 \begin_inset space ~
19015 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19016 This function is also bound to
19019 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19025 \begin_layout Standard
19026 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19029 \begin_layout Itemize
19031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19035 \begin_inset space \space{}
19038 this is too much space!
19041 \begin_layout Itemize
19042 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19046 \begin_layout Standard
19047 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19048 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19050 will take care of this.
19053 \begin_layout Standard
19054 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19058 \begin_inset space ~
19064 feature described in the section
19066 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19071 Additional Features
19076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19078 \begin_inset Index idx
19081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19082 Typography ! Quotation marks
19088 \begin_inset Index idx
19091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19092 Quotation marks | see
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 \begin_layout Standard
19124 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19125 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19126 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19136 The keyboard character,
19140 , generates this automatically.
19143 \begin_layout Standard
19144 You can specify what character the
19148 key produces by using the submenu
19154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19158 \begin_inset Index idx
19161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 Document ! Settings
19167 dialog and switching the
19171 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19172 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19174 \begin_inset space ~
19180 \begin_layout Labeling
19181 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19193 \begin_inset space ~
19197 \begin_inset space ~
19201 \begin_inset Quotes els
19205 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19219 \begin_inset Quotes els
19223 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19226 quotation marks (as common, e.
19227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19233 \begin_layout Labeling
19234 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19237 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19241 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19245 \begin_inset space ~
19249 \begin_inset space ~
19253 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19257 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19263 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19267 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19271 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19275 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19278 quotation marks (as common, e.
19279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19285 \begin_layout Labeling
19286 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19289 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19293 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19297 \begin_inset space ~
19301 \begin_inset space ~
19305 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19309 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19315 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19319 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19323 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19327 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19330 quotation marks (as common, e.
19331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19337 \begin_layout Labeling
19338 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19341 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19345 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19349 \begin_inset space ~
19353 \begin_inset space ~
19357 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19361 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19367 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19371 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19375 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19379 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19382 quotation marks (as common, e.
19383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19389 \begin_layout Labeling
19390 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19393 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19397 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19401 \begin_inset space ~
19405 \begin_inset space ~
19409 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19413 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19419 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19423 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19427 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19431 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19434 quotation marks (as common, e.
19435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19438 g., in Switzerland)
19441 \begin_layout Labeling
19442 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19445 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19449 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19453 \begin_inset space ~
19457 \begin_inset space ~
19461 \begin_inset Quotes als
19465 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19471 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19475 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19479 \begin_inset Quotes als
19483 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19486 quotation marks (as common, e.
19487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19493 \begin_layout Labeling
19494 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19497 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19501 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19505 \begin_inset space ~
19509 \begin_inset space ~
19513 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19517 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19523 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19527 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19531 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19535 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19538 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19541 \begin_layout Labeling
19542 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19545 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19549 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19553 \begin_inset space ~
19557 \begin_inset space ~
19561 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19565 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19571 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19575 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19579 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19583 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19586 quotation marks (as common, e.
19587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19590 g., in Great Britain)
19593 \begin_layout Labeling
19594 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19597 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19601 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19605 \begin_inset space ~
19609 \begin_inset space ~
19613 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19617 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19623 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19627 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19631 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19635 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19638 quotation marks (as common, e.
19639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19645 \begin_layout Labeling
19646 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19649 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19653 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19657 \begin_inset space ~
19661 \begin_inset space ~
19665 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19669 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19675 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19679 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19683 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19687 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19690 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19695 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19696 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19697 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19698 the inner marks differ).
19706 \begin_layout Labeling
19707 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19710 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19714 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19718 \begin_inset space ~
19722 \begin_inset space ~
19726 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19730 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19736 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19740 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19744 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19748 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19751 quotation marks (as common, e.
19752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19758 \begin_layout Labeling
19759 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19762 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19766 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19770 \begin_inset space ~
19774 \begin_inset space ~
19778 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19782 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19788 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19792 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19796 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19800 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19803 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19806 \begin_layout Labeling
19807 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19808 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19816 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19822 \begin_inset space ~
19826 \begin_inset space ~
19832 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19840 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19844 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19848 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19852 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19856 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19859 quotation marks (as common, e.
19860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19869 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19877 \begin_layout Labeling
19878 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19879 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19887 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19893 \begin_inset space ~
19897 \begin_inset space ~
19903 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19911 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19915 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19919 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19923 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19927 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19930 quotation marks (as common, e.
19931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19934 g., in North Korea and China)
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19939 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19940 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19948 \begin_layout Standard
19949 Inner quotation marks
19953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19955 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19956 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19964 does not necessarily mean
19965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19973 This is why we call them
19974 \begin_inset Quotes els
19978 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19994 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19996 \begin_inset Quotes els
20000 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20003 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20006 arg "quote-insert inner"
20011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20017 \begin_layout Standard
20018 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20019 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20020 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20021 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20022 If you check the setting
20024 Use dynamic quotation marks
20028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20029 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20032 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20033 they appear in a special color).
20034 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20035 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20040 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20043 \begin_layout Standard
20044 Individual quotation marks (i.
20045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20048 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20049 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20053 \begin_layout Subsection
20055 \begin_inset Index idx
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 Typography ! Ligatures
20065 \begin_inset Index idx
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20099 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20106 \begin_layout Standard
20107 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20108 print them as single characters.
20109 These groups are known as
20114 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20115 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20117 Here are the standard ligatures:
20120 \begin_layout Itemize
20124 \begin_layout Itemize
20128 \begin_layout Itemize
20132 \begin_layout Itemize
20136 \begin_layout Itemize
20140 \begin_layout Standard
20141 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20144 \begin_layout Standard
20145 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20146 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20154 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20170 To break a ligature, use
20172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20173 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20175 \begin_inset space ~
20182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20193 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20210 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20218 \begin_layout Subsection
20220 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20222 \begin_inset Index idx
20225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 \begin_layout Standard
20238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20239 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20243 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20246 \begin_layout Description
20248 The name of the game.
20251 \begin_layout Description
20253 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20257 \begin_layout Description
20259 The \SpecialChar TeX
20260 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20264 \begin_layout Description
20265 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20266 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20270 \begin_layout Standard
20271 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20277 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20285 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20286 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20287 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20288 converges to the number
20289 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20292 : The actual version is
20293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20301 , the previous one was
20302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20313 \begin_layout Subsection
20315 \begin_inset Index idx
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 \begin_layout Standard
20328 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20329 space between two words.
20330 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20340 for units use the menu
20342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20343 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20345 \begin_inset space ~
20353 arg "space-insert thin"
20359 \begin_layout Standard
20360 Here is an example to show the differences:
20363 \begin_layout Standard
20364 \begin_inset Tabular
20365 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20366 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20367 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20368 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 \begin_inset space ~
20379 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 space between number and unit
20398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20407 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 half space between number and unit
20432 \begin_layout Subsection
20434 \begin_inset Index idx
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20446 \begin_layout Standard
20447 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20449 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20450 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20451 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20452 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20453 These bits of text became known as
20464 \begin_layout Standard
20465 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20466 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20467 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20468 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20469 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20470 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20471 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20472 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20473 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20474 \begin_inset Newline newline
20482 \begin_inset Newline newline
20490 \begin_inset Newline newline
20493 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20494 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20495 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20497 \begin_inset space ~
20501 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20503 key "latexcompanion"
20509 \begin_inset space ~
20513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20520 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20521 's page break mechanism.
20524 \begin_layout Chapter
20525 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20528 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20535 \begin_layout Standard
20536 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20539 \begin_inset space ~
20545 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20548 \begin_layout Section
20550 \begin_inset Index idx
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20569 \begin_layout Standard
20571 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20574 \begin_layout Description
20577 \begin_inset space ~
20580 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20581 \begin_inset Newline newline
20585 \begin_inset Note Note
20588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20589 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20597 \begin_layout Description
20598 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20599 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20600 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20603 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20604 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20606 \begin_inset space ~
20612 \begin_inset Newline newline
20616 \begin_inset Note Comment
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20620 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20629 \begin_layout Description
20631 \begin_inset space ~
20634 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20635 set in the document settings under
20637 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20639 \begin_inset space ~
20645 \begin_inset Newline newline
20649 \begin_inset Newline newline
20653 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20663 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20668 of a comment that appears in the output.
20674 \begin_inset Newline newline
20678 \begin_inset Newline newline
20681 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20684 \begin_layout Standard
20685 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20697 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20700 \begin_layout Section
20702 \begin_inset Index idx
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20714 name "sec:Footnotes"
20721 \begin_layout Standard
20723 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20729 or the toolbar button
20732 arg "footnote-insert"
20744 \begin_inset Graphics
20745 filename clipart/footnote.png
20754 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20755 's representation of your footnote.
20765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20784 label, the box will
20788 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20789 Clicking on the box label again will close
20802 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20803 and click on the footnote
20818 \begin_layout Standard
20819 Here is an example footnote:
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20836 \begin_layout Standard
20837 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20838 position where the footnote box is placed.
20839 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20840 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20841 according to the document class.
20843 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20844 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20850 ey are described in the
20853 \begin_inset space ~
20861 \begin_layout Section
20863 \begin_inset Index idx
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20875 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20882 \begin_layout Standard
20883 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20885 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20887 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20889 \begin_inset space ~
20894 or the toolbar button
20897 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20923 appearing within your text.
20924 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20925 's representation of your margin
20934 \begin_layout Standard
20935 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20939 \begin_inset Marginal
20942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20944 This is a marginal note.
20952 \begin_layout Standard
20953 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20954 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20955 pages, right on odd pages.
20958 \begin_layout Standard
20959 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20962 \begin_inset space ~
20970 \begin_inset space ~
20978 \begin_layout Section
20979 Graphics and Images
20980 \begin_inset Index idx
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 \begin_inset Index idx
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21002 name "sec:Graphics"
21009 \begin_layout Standard
21010 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21011 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21014 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21023 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21026 \begin_layout Standard
21027 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21032 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21033 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21035 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21036 \begin_inset space ~
21040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21042 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21049 \begin_layout Standard
21054 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21055 of the image in the output.
21056 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21060 \begin_inset space ~
21064 \begin_inset space ~
21073 \begin_inset space ~
21077 \begin_inset space ~
21081 \begin_inset space ~
21086 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21087 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21095 \begin_layout Standard
21099 \begin_inset space ~
21103 \begin_inset space ~
21108 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21109 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21111 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21116 \begin_inset space ~
21121 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21122 with the image size is printed.
21125 \begin_layout Standard
21126 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21127 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21129 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21132 \begin_layout Standard
21134 \begin_inset Graphics
21135 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21143 \begin_layout Standard
21144 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21145 the image into a float, see section
21146 \begin_inset space ~
21150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21152 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21159 \begin_layout Subsection
21161 \begin_inset Index idx
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21173 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21180 \begin_layout Standard
21181 You can insert images in any known file format.
21182 But as we explained in section
21183 \begin_inset space ~
21187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21189 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21193 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21195 therefore uses the program
21199 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21200 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21201 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21202 \begin_inset space ~
21206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21208 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21215 \begin_layout Standard
21216 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21219 \begin_layout Description
21221 \begin_inset space ~
21224 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21225 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21226 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21230 Graphics Interchange Format
21231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21234 (GIF, file extension
21235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21247 \begin_inset Index idx
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21282 Portable Network Graphics
21283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21286 (PNG, file extension
21287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21299 \begin_inset Index idx
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21334 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21338 (JPG, file extension
21339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21363 \begin_inset Index idx
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 \begin_layout Description
21399 \begin_inset space ~
21402 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21404 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21405 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21406 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21407 \begin_inset Newline newline
21410 Scalable image formats can be
21411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21414 Scalable Vector Graphics
21415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21418 (SVG, file extension
21419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21431 \begin_inset Index idx
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21466 Encapsulated PostScript
21467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21470 (EPS, file extension
21471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21483 \begin_inset Index idx
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21518 Portable Document Format
21519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21522 (PDF, file extension
21523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21535 \begin_inset Index idx
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21553 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21554 result will not be scalable.
21555 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21569 \begin_layout Standard
21570 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21577 \begin_layout Subsection
21578 Grouping of Image Settings
21579 \begin_inset Index idx
21582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 Images ! Settings grouping
21591 \begin_layout Standard
21592 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21594 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21595 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21597 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21598 need to manually change each of them.
21602 \begin_layout Standard
21603 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21606 \begin_inset space ~
21610 \begin_inset space ~
21622 \begin_inset space ~
21626 \begin_inset space ~
21632 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21633 and checking the name of the desired group.
21636 \begin_layout Section
21638 \begin_inset Index idx
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21657 \begin_layout Standard
21658 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21661 arg "tabular-insert"
21666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21670 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21671 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21672 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21675 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21676 from the rest of the table.
21677 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21678 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21680 Here is an example table:
21683 \begin_layout Standard
21685 \begin_inset Tabular
21686 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21687 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21688 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21689 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21690 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21691 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21893 \begin_layout Standard
21895 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21896 This corresponds to the
21897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21904 table style listed in the style selection.
21907 \begin_layout Standard
21909 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21910 Other available styles include:
21913 \begin_layout Itemize
21915 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21924 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21928 \begin_layout Itemize
21930 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21931 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21934 \begin_layout Itemize
21936 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21945 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21946 bold top/bottom lines (see
21957 \begin_layout Standard
21959 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21960 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21961 button can be changed in
21963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21964 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21968 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21972 \begin_layout Subsection
21976 \begin_layout Standard
21977 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21980 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21984 This brings up the table dialog.
21985 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21986 cursor is placed currently.
21987 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21988 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21989 done on all of your selection.
21992 \begin_layout Standard
21993 In addition to the table dialog, the
21996 \begin_inset space ~
22001 helps you in setting table properties.
22002 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22005 \begin_layout Standard
22009 \begin_inset space ~
22014 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22015 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22016 current cell respectively.
22017 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22019 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22020 of text, see section
22021 \begin_inset space ~
22025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22027 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22034 \begin_layout Standard
22035 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22036 using the check box
22045 This will merge the cells to
22049 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22050 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22051 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22052 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22053 in the last row without the upper border:
22056 \begin_layout Standard
22058 \begin_inset Tabular
22059 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22060 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22062 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22075 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22084 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22160 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 \begin_layout Standard
22196 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22197 -arguments for the table.
22198 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22199 explained in the chapter
22206 \begin_inset space ~
22212 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22213 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22214 but are visible in the output.
22217 \begin_layout Standard
22218 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22226 Most DVI-viewers are
22230 able to display rotations.
22238 \begin_layout Standard
22243 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22248 adds lines for all cell borders.
22251 \begin_layout Subsection
22253 \begin_inset Index idx
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22257 Tables ! Multi-page
22263 \begin_inset Index idx
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 \begin_layout Standard
22276 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22279 \begin_inset space ~
22283 \begin_inset space ~
22291 \begin_inset space ~
22296 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22297 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22300 \begin_layout Description
22305 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22306 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22307 Except for the first page, if
22310 \begin_inset space ~
22318 \begin_layout Description
22322 \begin_inset space ~
22327 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22328 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22331 \begin_layout Description
22336 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22337 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22338 except for the last page, if
22341 \begin_inset space ~
22349 \begin_layout Description
22353 \begin_inset space ~
22358 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22359 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22362 \begin_layout Description
22363 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22364 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22370 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22373 \begin_inset space ~
22381 \begin_layout Standard
22382 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22383 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22384 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22390 In this context, first means first in this order:
22393 \begin_inset space ~
22405 \begin_inset space ~
22410 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22413 \begin_layout Standard
22415 \begin_inset Tabular
22416 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22417 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22418 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22419 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22420 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22421 <row endfirsthead="true">
22422 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22433 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22452 <row endfirsthead="true">
22453 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22464 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22485 <row endhead="true">
22486 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22516 <row endhead="true">
22517 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22549 <row endfoot="true">
22550 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23560 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24346 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24377 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24470 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24531 <row endlastfoot="true">
24532 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24569 \begin_layout Subsection
24571 \begin_inset Index idx
24574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24583 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24590 \begin_layout Standard
24591 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24592 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24593 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24594 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24598 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24601 \begin_layout Standard
24602 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24603 for the column in the table dialog.
24604 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24605 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24609 \begin_layout Standard
24611 \begin_inset Tabular
24612 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24613 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24614 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24615 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24616 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24636 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24705 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24761 This is longer now.
24766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24817 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24818 This is longer now.
24823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 \begin_layout Standard
24850 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24851 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24856 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24857 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24863 Selection with the mouse or with
24867 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24868 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24869 the selection from outside the table.
24872 \begin_layout Section
24874 \begin_inset Index idx
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24893 \begin_layout Subsection
24897 \begin_layout Standard
24898 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24899 have a fixed location.
24901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24908 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24916 \begin_inset space ~
24921 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24922 too many notes on the current page.
24925 \begin_layout Standard
24926 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24927 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24928 and pages without text.
24929 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24930 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24931 Floats are therefore numbered.
24932 Referencing is described in section
24933 \begin_inset space ~
24937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24939 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24946 \begin_layout Standard
24947 To insert a float, use the menu
24949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24953 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24954 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24956 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24957 \begin_inset Index idx
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24966 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24967 paragraph within the float.
24968 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24969 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24970 left-clicking on the box label.
24971 A closed float box looks like this:
24972 \begin_inset Graphics
24973 filename clipart/float.png
24978 – a gray button with a red label.
24981 \begin_layout Standard
24982 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24984 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24987 \begin_layout Subsection
24989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24991 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24996 \begin_inset Index idx
24999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25000 Floats ! Figure floats
25008 \begin_layout Standard
25010 \begin_inset space ~
25014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25016 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25020 was created using the menu
25022 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25023 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25029 arg "float-insert figure"
25033 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25042 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25046 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25047 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25049 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25051 \begin_inset space ~
25059 arg "layout-paragraph"
25065 \begin_layout Standard
25066 \begin_inset Float figure
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25075 \begin_inset Graphics
25076 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25086 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25091 name "fig:A-star-in"
25108 \begin_layout Standard
25109 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25110 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25121 ) and refer to it using the menu
25123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25129 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25133 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25134 vague references like
25135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25142 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25143 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25153 For more about cross-references, see section
25154 \begin_inset space ~
25158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25160 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25167 \begin_layout Standard
25168 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25169 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25170 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25171 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25172 as described in section
25173 \begin_inset space ~
25177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25179 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25185 \begin_inset space ~
25189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25191 reference "fig:Two-images"
25195 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25196 You can also set the images one below the other.
25198 \begin_inset space ~
25202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25204 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25211 reference "fig:Star"
25215 are the subfigures.
25218 \begin_layout Standard
25219 \begin_inset Float figure
25226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25227 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25231 \begin_inset Float figure
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25239 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25244 name "fig:Undefinable"
25256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25257 \begin_inset Graphics
25258 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25270 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25274 \begin_inset Float figure
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 \begin_inset Graphics
25301 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25313 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25325 name "fig:Two-images"
25342 \begin_layout Subsection
25344 \begin_inset Index idx
25347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 Floats ! Table floats
25356 \begin_layout Standard
25357 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25360 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25363 or the toolbar button
25366 arg "float-insert table"
25370 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25371 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25372 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25374 \begin_inset space ~
25378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25380 reference "tab:Table-float"
25387 \begin_layout Standard
25388 \begin_inset Float table
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25396 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25401 name "tab:Table-float"
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25415 \begin_inset Tabular
25416 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25417 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25420 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25547 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25568 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25571 \end{array}\right]$
25579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25592 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25613 \begin_layout Subsection
25615 \begin_inset Index idx
25618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25627 \begin_layout Standard
25629 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25630 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25631 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25633 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25641 \begin_inset space ~
25649 \begin_layout Section
25651 \begin_inset Index idx
25654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25663 \begin_layout Standard
25665 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25667 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25668 \begin_inset space \space{}
25675 \begin_layout Standard
25676 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25677 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25683 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25684 and its alignment within the page.
25687 \begin_layout Standard
25689 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25699 height_special "totalheight"
25704 backgroundcolor "none"
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25710 This is a minipage.
25711 The text is set in an italic style.
25714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25717 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25718 another formatting.
25726 \begin_layout Standard
25727 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25730 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25734 as described in section
25735 \begin_inset space ~
25739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25741 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25746 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25752 \begin_layout Standard
25753 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25763 height_special "totalheight"
25768 backgroundcolor "none"
25771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25772 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25773 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25779 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25783 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25793 height_special "totalheight"
25798 backgroundcolor "none"
25801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25802 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25803 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25811 \begin_layout Standard
25812 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25818 \begin_layout Standard
25819 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25821 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25828 \begin_inset space ~
25836 \begin_layout Chapter
25837 Mathematical Formulas
25838 \begin_inset Index idx
25841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25848 \begin_inset Index idx
25851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25882 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25889 \begin_layout Standard
25890 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25895 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25898 \begin_layout Section
25900 \begin_inset Index idx
25903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25912 \begin_layout Standard
25913 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25926 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25928 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25929 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25930 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25938 \begin_layout Standard
25939 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25943 \begin_inset space ~
25948 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25951 \begin_layout Standard
25952 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25953 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25956 \begin_layout Standard
25957 This is a line with an inline formula
25958 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25964 \begin_layout Standard
25965 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25966 paragraph, like this one:
25967 \begin_inset Formula
25974 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25977 \begin_layout Standard
25979 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25981 For example, typing
25982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25995 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25996 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26000 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26003 \begin_inset space ~
26011 \begin_layout Subsection
26012 Navigating in Formulas
26013 \begin_inset Index idx
26016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 \begin_layout Standard
26026 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26027 achieved with the arrow keys.
26029 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26030 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26035 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26036 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26040 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26044 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26047 \end{array}\right]$
26055 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26060 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26061 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26064 \begin_layout Standard
26069 , printed in this document as
26070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26074 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26081 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26082 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26083 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26088 For example, if you want
26089 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26097 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26107 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26111 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26116 , since in the latter case only the
26119 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26124 will be under the square root sign:
26125 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26131 \begin_layout Standard
26132 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26134 \begin_inset Formula
26136 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26145 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26146 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26149 \begin_layout Subsection
26153 \begin_layout Standard
26154 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26155 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26159 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26160 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26161 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26162 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26163 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26167 \begin_layout Subsection
26168 Exponents and Subscripts
26169 \begin_inset Index idx
26172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26179 \begin_inset Index idx
26182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26191 \begin_layout Standard
26192 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26195 arg "math-superscript"
26201 arg "math-subscript"
26204 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26206 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26209 , type in a formula
26212 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26222 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26228 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26232 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26238 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26244 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26253 , you have to use an extra
26257 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26258 For example, if you want
26259 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26265 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26271 Subscripts are similar: To get
26272 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26278 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26286 \begin_layout Subsection
26288 \begin_inset Index idx
26291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26300 \begin_layout Standard
26301 Create a fraction either with the command
26307 or by using the icon
26310 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26316 \begin_inset space ~
26322 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26323 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26324 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26329 To move back up, press
26334 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26335 \begin_inset Formula
26337 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26340 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26348 \begin_layout Subsection
26350 \begin_inset Index idx
26353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26362 \begin_layout Standard
26363 Roots can be created using the
26366 \begin_inset space ~
26374 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26380 arg "math-insert \\root"
26402 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26408 always produces a square root.
26411 \begin_layout Subsection
26412 Operators with Limits
26413 \begin_inset Index idx
26416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26423 \begin_inset Index idx
26426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26435 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26442 \begin_layout Standard
26444 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26448 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26451 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26452 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26453 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26454 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26455 The sum operator will automatically place its
26456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26463 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26465 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26469 \begin_inset Formula
26471 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26476 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26480 \begin_layout Standard
26481 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26483 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26484 behind the operator and using the menu
26486 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26487 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26489 \begin_inset space ~
26493 \begin_inset space ~
26507 \begin_layout Standard
26508 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26517 \begin_inset Index idx
26520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26527 \begin_inset Formula
26529 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26534 which will place the
26535 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26547 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26548 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26554 \begin_layout Standard
26555 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26562 Have a look at section
26563 \begin_inset space ~
26567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26569 reference "subsec:Functions"
26573 for an explanation of function macros.
26576 \begin_layout Subsection
26578 \begin_inset Index idx
26581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26590 \begin_layout Standard
26591 Most math symbols can be found in the
26594 \begin_inset space ~
26599 under one of several categories; including
26616 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26622 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26623 don't have to use the
26626 \begin_inset space ~
26631 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26633 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26636 \begin_layout Subsection
26638 \begin_inset Index idx
26641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 \begin_layout Standard
26651 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26657 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26663 \begin_inset space ~
26671 arg "math-insert \\space"
26675 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26676 For example, the sequence
26681 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26684 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26686 \begin_inset Graphics
26687 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26692 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26693 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26694 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26695 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26696 , because they are negative
26698 Here are two examples:
26701 \begin_layout Standard
26711 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26717 \begin_layout Standard
26727 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26733 \begin_layout Subsection
26735 \begin_inset Index idx
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26747 name "subsec:Functions"
26754 \begin_layout Standard
26758 \begin_inset space ~
26763 contains under the button
26766 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26769 a number of function macros, such as
26770 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26774 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26782 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26789 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26790 avoid confusions, because
26791 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26795 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26801 \begin_layout Standard
26802 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26804 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26808 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26814 \begin_layout Standard
26815 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26816 are placed, as described in section
26817 \begin_inset space ~
26821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26823 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26830 \begin_layout Subsection
26832 \begin_inset Index idx
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26844 \begin_layout Standard
26845 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26847 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26848 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26849 commands, for example, to enter
26850 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26853 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26854 Our example is entered by typing
26859 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26866 \begin_inset space ~
26870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26872 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26876 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26879 \begin_layout Standard
26880 \begin_inset Float table
26887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26888 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26893 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26897 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26907 \begin_inset Tabular
26908 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26909 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26996 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27050 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27104 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27158 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27212 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27266 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27320 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27428 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27473 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27494 \begin_layout Standard
27495 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27498 \begin_inset space ~
27506 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27509 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27513 \begin_layout Section
27514 Brackets and Delimiters
27515 \begin_inset Index idx
27518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27525 \begin_inset Index idx
27528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27537 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27544 \begin_layout Standard
27545 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27547 For some purposes, using just the keys
27552 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27553 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27554 toolbar delimiter icon
27557 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27561 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27562 \begin_inset Formula
27564 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27572 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27573 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27577 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27580 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27586 \begin_inset Formula
27588 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27596 \begin_layout Standard
27597 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27598 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27602 \begin_layout Standard
27603 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27604 left side and right side.
27605 If you use the option
27608 \begin_inset space ~
27613 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27614 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27616 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27621 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27622 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27625 \begin_layout Standard
27626 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27627 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27628 is to go inside the brackets.
27629 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27634 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27635 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27636 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27640 arg "math-delim ( )"
27646 \begin_layout Section
27647 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27648 \begin_inset Index idx
27651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27658 \begin_inset Index idx
27661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27668 \begin_inset Index idx
27671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27672 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27680 \begin_layout Standard
27681 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27685 \begin_inset space ~
27693 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27697 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27698 Here is an example:
27699 \begin_inset Formula
27701 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27710 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27711 \begin_inset space ~
27715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27717 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27722 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27723 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27724 This alignment is set in the box
27729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27778 for every column as default.
27779 For example, the sequence
27780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27791 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27792 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27793 corresponds to the relevant column.
27794 The result will look like this:
27795 \begin_inset Formula
27798 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27799 column & has & has\,right\\
27800 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27809 \begin_layout Standard
27810 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27813 arg "newline-insert newline"
27816 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27817 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27819 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27822 or the math toolbar.
27825 \begin_layout Standard
27826 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27827 It can be created with the menu
27829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27830 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27832 \begin_inset space ~
27844 Here is an example:
27845 \begin_inset Formula
27859 \begin_layout Standard
27860 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27863 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27866 arg "newline-insert newline"
27870 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27875 arg "newline-insert newline"
27878 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27886 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27887 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27888 A new row is created by every further entry of
27891 arg "newline-insert newline"
27895 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27896 Here is an example:
27897 \begin_inset Formula
27899 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27900 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27905 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27906 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27907 \begin_inset Formula
27909 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27917 \begin_layout Standard
27918 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27925 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27926 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27929 reference "eq:asquared"
27934 The other types are described in section
27935 \begin_inset space ~
27939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27941 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27948 \begin_layout Section
27949 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27950 \begin_inset Index idx
27953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27954 Math ! Formula numbering
27960 \begin_inset Index idx
27963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27964 Math ! Referencing formulas
27970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27972 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27979 \begin_layout Standard
27980 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27982 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27983 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27985 \begin_inset space ~
27989 \begin_inset space ~
27997 arg "math-number-toggle"
28001 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28002 within parentheses.
28003 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28004 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28005 the document class.
28006 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28007 separated by a dot:
28008 \begin_inset Formula
28018 arg "math-number-toggle"
28021 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28022 You can only number displayed formulas.
28025 \begin_layout Standard
28026 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28028 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28029 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28031 \begin_inset space ~
28035 \begin_inset space ~
28043 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28046 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28047 \begin_inset Formula
28050 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28056 To number all lines use the shortcut
28059 arg "math-number-toggle"
28065 \begin_layout Standard
28066 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28069 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28070 A label is inserted with the menu
28072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28081 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28082 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28083 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28095 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28096 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28097 We inserted in the following example the label
28098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28105 in the second line:
28106 \begin_inset Formula
28108 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28109 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28114 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28115 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28116 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28120 \begin_inset space ~
28128 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28132 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28133 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28134 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28135 as the formula number:
28138 \begin_layout Standard
28139 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28142 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28149 \begin_layout Standard
28150 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28151 's cross-reference box are described in section
28152 \begin_inset space ~
28156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28158 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28163 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28171 \begin_layout Section
28172 User defined math macros
28173 \begin_inset Index idx
28176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28185 \begin_layout Standard
28187 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28188 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28189 Math macros are explained in section
28192 \begin_inset space ~
28204 \begin_layout Section
28208 \begin_layout Subsection
28210 \begin_inset Index idx
28213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28222 \begin_layout Standard
28223 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28224 To set a font in a formula, use the
28227 \begin_inset space ~
28235 arg "math-insert \\font"
28238 , or enter its command, listed in table
28239 \begin_inset space ~
28243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28245 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28252 \begin_layout Standard
28253 \begin_inset Float table
28260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28261 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28266 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28270 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28280 \begin_inset Tabular
28281 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28282 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28283 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28284 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28316 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28343 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28370 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28403 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28430 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28452 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28458 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28459 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28472 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28488 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28522 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28544 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28550 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28558 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28571 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28587 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28621 \begin_layout Standard
28622 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28630 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28633 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28635 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28639 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28658 \begin_layout Standard
28659 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28660 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28665 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28666 space when you need a space in the box.
28667 Here is an example where
28668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28679 denotes the set of numbers:
28680 \begin_inset Formula
28682 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28690 \begin_layout Standard
28691 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28692 You can, for example, put a character in
28701 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28705 \begin_inset Newline newline
28708 So it is better not to use this feature.
28711 \begin_layout Standard
28712 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28713 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28717 \begin_inset Newline newline
28720 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28726 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28727 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28733 \begin_layout Standard
28740 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28743 \begin_layout Standard
28744 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28746 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28747 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28749 \begin_inset space ~
28757 \begin_layout Subsection
28759 \begin_inset Index idx
28762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28771 \begin_layout Standard
28772 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28774 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28778 \begin_inset space ~
28782 \begin_inset space ~
28790 \begin_inset space ~
28798 arg "math-insert \\font"
28802 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28803 in black instead of blue.
28804 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28805 Here is an example:
28806 \begin_inset Formula
28809 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28810 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28819 \begin_layout Subsection
28821 \begin_inset Index idx
28824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28833 \begin_layout Standard
28834 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28835 automatically chosen in most situations.
28853 For most characters,
28861 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28862 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28867 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28868 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28869 thinks are appropriate.
28870 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28873 arg "math-insert \\style"
28877 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28878 For example, you can set
28879 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28882 , which is normally in
28891 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28895 The four styles are used in the following example:
28898 \begin_layout Standard
28899 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28903 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28907 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28911 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28917 \begin_layout Standard
28918 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28919 is set in a particular size with the menu
28921 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28923 \begin_inset space ~
28928 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28929 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28930 will be adjusted to correspond.
28931 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28942 \begin_layout Standard
28946 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28952 \begin_layout Section
28953 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28955 \begin_inset Index idx
28958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28965 \begin_inset Index idx
28968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28977 \begin_layout Standard
28979 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28980 that are in common use.
28983 \begin_layout Subsection
28984 Enabling AMS-Support
28987 \begin_layout Standard
28988 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28989 the document by selecting the checkbox
28992 \begin_inset space ~
28996 \begin_inset space ~
29000 \begin_inset space ~
29007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29011 \begin_inset Index idx
29014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29015 Document ! Settings
29023 \begin_inset space ~
29029 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29030 -errors in formulas,
29031 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29034 \begin_layout Subsection
29036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29038 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29043 \begin_inset Index idx
29046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29047 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29055 \begin_layout Standard
29056 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29057 provides a selection of different formula types.
29059 allows you to choose between
29080 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29088 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29091 \begin_layout Chapter
29095 \begin_layout Section
29097 \begin_inset Index idx
29100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29109 name "sec:Cross-References"
29116 \begin_layout Standard
29117 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29118 's strengths is cross-references.
29119 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29121 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29122 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29123 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29126 \begin_layout Enumerate
29130 \begin_layout Enumerate
29131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29133 name "enu:Second-item"
29140 \begin_layout Enumerate
29144 \begin_layout Standard
29145 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29150 or by pressing the toolbar button
29157 A gray label box like this:
29158 \begin_inset Graphics
29159 filename clipart/label.png
29163 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29165 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29200 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29201 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29217 \begin_layout Standard
29218 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29223 or the toolbar button
29226 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29230 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29231 \begin_inset Graphics
29232 filename clipart/reference.png
29236 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29238 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29251 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29255 \begin_layout Standard
29256 As an alternative to
29258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29261 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29266 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29267 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29269 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29281 \begin_layout Standard
29282 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29283 \begin_inset space ~
29287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29289 reference "enu:Second-item"
29296 \begin_layout Standard
29297 It is recommended to use a protected space
29301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29302 described in section
29303 \begin_inset space ~
29307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29309 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29318 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29319 line breaks between them.
29322 \begin_layout Standard
29323 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29326 \begin_layout Description
29327 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29330 reference "fig:Two-images"
29337 \begin_layout Description
29338 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29339 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29351 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29358 \begin_layout Description
29359 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29360 \begin_inset space ~
29364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29365 LatexCommand pageref
29366 reference "fig:Two-images"
29373 \begin_layout Description
29375 \begin_inset space ~
29379 \begin_inset space ~
29382 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29384 LatexCommand vpageref
29385 reference "fig:Two-images"
29390 \begin_inset Newline newline
29393 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29394 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29395 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29396 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29397 it prints “on the next page”.
29398 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29401 \begin_layout Description
29403 \begin_inset space ~
29407 \begin_inset space ~
29411 \begin_inset space ~
29414 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29417 reference "fig:Two-images"
29422 \begin_inset Newline newline
29425 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29431 ; otherwise it behaves like
29435 \begin_inset space ~
29439 \begin_inset space ~
29448 \begin_layout Description
29450 \begin_inset space ~
29453 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29454 \begin_inset Newline newline
29458 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29466 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29476 \begin_inset Index idx
29479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29481 packages ! prettyref
29487 \begin_inset Index idx
29490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29492 packages ! refstyle
29503 \begin_inset Newline newline
29506 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29507 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29510 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29514 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29515 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29523 is the default and preferred because
29527 supports only English documents.
29528 The format is specified by using the command
29540 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29541 preamble of the document.
29542 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29560 \begin_inset Newline newline
29567 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29572 \begin_inset Newline newline
29583 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29584 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29586 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29587 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29592 , you might do so as follows:
29593 \begin_inset Newline newline
29600 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29605 \begin_inset Newline newline
29608 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29609 the package documentation
29610 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29612 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29618 \begin_inset Newline newline
29629 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29636 \begin_layout Description
29638 \begin_inset space ~
29641 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29643 LatexCommand nameref
29644 reference "fig:Two-images"
29651 \begin_layout Description
29653 \begin_inset space ~
29656 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29657 label for the reference:
29658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29659 LatexCommand labelonly
29660 reference "fig:Two-images"
29665 \begin_inset Newline newline
29668 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29669 Code, if you want to issue a command
29670 that \SpecialChar LyX
29676 , then you may want to use the
29679 \begin_inset space ~
29684 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29694 This is the form needed for e.
29695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29699 \begin_inset space \space{}
29706 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29707 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29709 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29713 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29717 \begin_layout Standard
29718 You can only use the style
29722 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29726 is always possible.
29729 \begin_layout Standard
29730 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29731 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29733 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29734 \begin_inset space ~
29738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29740 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29747 \begin_layout Standard
29748 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29752 \begin_inset space ~
29756 \begin_inset space ~
29761 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29762 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29765 \begin_inset space ~
29770 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29771 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29774 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29781 You can change labels at any time.
29782 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29783 do not need to think about this.
29786 \begin_layout Standard
29787 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29789 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29793 \begin_layout Standard
29794 References are described in detail in the section
29795 \begin_inset space ~
29805 \begin_inset space ~
29813 \begin_layout Section
29814 Table of Contents and other Listings
29815 \begin_inset Index idx
29818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29825 \begin_inset Index idx
29828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29829 Navigating ! Outline
29835 \begin_inset Index idx
29838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29854 \begin_layout Subsection
29856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29858 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29865 \begin_layout Standard
29866 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29869 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29871 \begin_inset space ~
29875 \begin_inset space ~
29881 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29883 If you click on it, the
29887 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29888 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29889 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29891 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29893 \begin_inset space ~
29898 that is described in section
29899 \begin_inset space ~
29903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29905 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29912 \begin_layout Standard
29913 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29914 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29916 \begin_inset space ~
29920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29922 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29926 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29928 \begin_inset space ~
29932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29934 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29938 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29940 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29943 \begin_layout Subsection
29944 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29947 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29954 \begin_layout Standard
29955 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29957 You can insert them via the
29959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29960 List/Contents/References
29963 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29966 \begin_layout Section
29967 URLs and Hyperlinks
29968 \begin_inset Index idx
29971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29978 \begin_inset Index idx
29981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29990 \begin_layout Subsection
29992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30001 \begin_layout Standard
30002 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30011 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30013 \begin_inset Flex URL
30016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30018 https://www.lyx.org
30026 \begin_layout Standard
30027 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30033 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30037 \begin_layout Standard
30038 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30046 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30055 \begin_layout Subsection
30057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30059 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30066 \begin_layout Standard
30067 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30072 or with the toolbar button
30079 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30088 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30089 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30090 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30092 name "LyX's homepage"
30093 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30098 , an Email address like this:
30099 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30101 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30102 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30108 , or a link to a file.
30113 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30121 \begin_layout Standard
30122 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30135 to the link target.
30138 \begin_layout Standard
30139 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30140 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30141 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30142 the text style dialog.
30143 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30147 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30149 name "LyX's homepage"
30150 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30158 \begin_layout Standard
30159 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30163 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30170 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30172 \begin_inset Newline newline
30180 \begin_inset Newline newline
30187 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30188 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30192 \begin_layout Section
30194 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30196 \begin_inset Index idx
30199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30208 name "sec:Counters"
30215 \begin_layout Standard
30217 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30218 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30219 is its ability to manage counters.
30220 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30221 modify counters directly.
30222 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30224 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30225 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30226 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30227 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30228 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30232 \begin_layout Standard
30234 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30235 There are five commands you can use:
30238 \begin_layout Enumerate
30240 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30241 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30244 \begin_layout Enumerate
30246 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30247 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30248 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30251 \begin_layout Enumerate
30253 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30254 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30257 \begin_layout Enumerate
30259 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30260 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30264 \begin_layout Enumerate
30266 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30267 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30270 \begin_layout Standard
30272 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30273 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30274 those that are available in the current document class.
30279 \begin_layout Section
30281 \begin_inset Index idx
30284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30293 name "sec:Appendices"
30300 \begin_layout Standard
30301 Appendices are created with the menu
30303 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30305 \begin_inset space ~
30309 \begin_inset space ~
30315 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30316 as the appendix part of the book.
30317 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30320 \begin_layout Standard
30321 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30322 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30323 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30324 and the subsection number.
30325 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30329 \begin_layout Standard
30331 \begin_inset space ~
30335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30337 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30345 \begin_inset space ~
30349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30351 reference "subsec:Export"
30358 \begin_layout Section
30360 \begin_inset Index idx
30363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30372 name "sec:Bibliography"
30379 \begin_layout Standard
30380 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30382 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30383 \begin_inset space ~
30387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30389 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30396 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30401 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30402 \begin_inset space ~
30406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30408 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30413 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30414 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30415 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30419 using a bibliography database.
30422 \begin_layout Standard
30423 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30424 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30428 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30429 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30430 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30431 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30432 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30435 \begin_layout Subsection
30436 The Bibliography Environment
30437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30439 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30446 \begin_layout Standard
30451 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30453 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30462 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30464 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30465 of ASCII characters only.
30469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30471 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30474 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30480 \begin_inset Newline newline
30484 \begin_inset Flex URL
30487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30489 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30499 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30509 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30510 \begin_inset Newline newline
30517 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30518 the number of the entry.
30523 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30532 \begin_layout Standard
30533 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30538 or the toolbar button
30541 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30545 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30546 containing the available citations.
30547 Select one or more keys from the list and
30557 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30558 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30562 \begin_layout Standard
30563 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30564 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30565 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30577 \begin_layout Standard
30581 Companion Second Edition
30584 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30586 key "latexcompanion"
30594 \begin_layout Standard
30595 The \SpecialChar LyX
30596 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30597 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30607 \begin_layout Standard
30608 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30615 \begin_inset Index idx
30618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30627 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30628 the label needs to be given the form
30629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30640 Author A and Author B(Year)
30641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30648 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30655 \begin_inset space ~
30660 in the document settings
30661 \begin_inset Index idx
30664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30665 Document ! Settings
30672 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30674 \begin_inset space ~
30680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30682 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30690 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30692 Once you have done that, the
30696 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30713 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30714 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30715 These two are madatory.
30716 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30719 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30721 ) and in abrreviated form (
30728 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30729 add the abbreviated form to
30733 and the full list to the optional
30741 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30742 If specified like this,
30744 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30745 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30748 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30755 is specified, toggling
30756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30763 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30764 full and abbreviated list
30768 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30769 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30770 the citation references.
30771 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30776 \begin_layout Standard
30777 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30780 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30782 \begin_inset space ~
30790 arg "layout-paragraph"
30794 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30797 \begin_layout Subsection
30798 Bibliography databases
30799 \begin_inset Index idx
30802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30803 Bibliography ! Databases
30809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30811 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30818 \begin_layout Standard
30819 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30825 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30827 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30828 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30833 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30835 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30836 your working field in a database.
30837 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30838 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30839 list for that document.
30840 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30844 \begin_layout Standard
30845 The database is a text file with the file extension
30846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30857 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30858 The format is explained in
30859 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30866 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30868 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30870 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30876 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30877 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30878 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30880 \begin_inset Flex URL
30883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30885 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30893 \begin_layout Standard
30895 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30896 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30897 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30899 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30901 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30902 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30903 Those are addressed by
30908 \begin_inset Index idx
30911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 packages ! biblatex
30919 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30920 (although it has been significantly
30921 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30931 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30932 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30933 might conversely fail to correctly
30934 handle databases that use specific
30943 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30947 \begin_layout Standard
30948 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30953 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30959 \begin_inset Index idx
30962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 Document ! Settings
30975 \begin_inset space ~
30980 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30988 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30989 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30991 \begin_inset Index idx
30994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30995 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31004 \begin_layout Standard
31005 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31009 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31011 \begin_inset space ~
31017 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31018 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31026 Add bibliography to TOC
31028 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31033 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31034 in the document or just the cited references.
31036 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31041 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31042 differ from the encoding of the document.
31047 \begin_layout Standard
31048 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31049 style file is a text file with the file extension
31050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31061 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31062 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31063 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31064 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31066 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31072 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31073 \begin_inset Newline newline
31077 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31079 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31089 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31094 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31098 \begin_layout Standard
31099 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31102 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31104 \begin_inset Index idx
31107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31108 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31114 \begin_inset Index idx
31117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31119 packages ! biblatex
31127 \begin_layout Standard
31128 Accessing a database via
31132 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31136 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31138 \begin_inset space ~
31144 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31145 you cannot select a
31150 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31154 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31157 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31158 As for the styles, note the following.
31163 \begin_layout Standard
31168 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31181 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31182 file (text file with the file extension
31183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31194 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31195 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31197 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31201 \begin_layout Standard
31206 styles are not set in the
31209 \begin_inset space ~
31214 dialog, but in the document settings.
31215 \begin_inset Index idx
31218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31219 Document ! Settings
31224 However, in the dialog in the
31228 field, which is only visible if you use
31232 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31233 example how its heading will appear).
31234 These options are described in detail in the
31239 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31249 \begin_layout Standard
31250 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31251 \begin_inset space ~
31255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31257 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31267 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31268 Bibliography Processors
31271 \begin_layout Standard
31272 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31273 uses a bibliography processor,
31274 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31275 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31276 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31278 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31279 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31282 \begin_layout Standard
31283 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31285 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31286 You can do this on a general level in
31288 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31289 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31290 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31293 or for individual documents in
31295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31296 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31300 The following variants are available by default:
31303 \begin_layout Description
31304 biber a specific, modern processor
31305 \begin_inset Index idx
31308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31315 developed exclusively for
31319 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31325 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31330 makes use of; if you use the
31334 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31341 \begin_layout Description
31342 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31343 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31344 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31348 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31351 \begin_layout Description
31352 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31353 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31357 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31361 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31365 features are supported.
31368 \begin_layout Standard
31369 By default (with the
31375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31376 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31389 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31390 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31391 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31394 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31395 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31408 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31409 -based bibliography styles).
31410 This should suit most needs.
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31414 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31415 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31416 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31421 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31422 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31423 You can adjust it in
31425 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31426 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31427 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31433 \begin_layout Standard
31434 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31435 can add below the selection.
31436 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31437 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31453 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31457 \begin_layout Standard
31459 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31461 These are explained in detail in section
31463 Customizing Bibliographies
31467 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31472 Additional Features
31477 \begin_layout Subsection
31479 \begin_inset Index idx
31482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31483 Bibliography ! Citation format
31489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31491 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31498 \begin_layout Standard
31499 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31504 \begin_inset space \space{}
31507 numerical citation (as
31508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31515 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31523 ) or author-year citations (as
31524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31533 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31537 \begin_layout Standard
31538 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31542 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31546 \begin_inset Index idx
31549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31550 Document ! Settings
31555 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31561 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31562 labels, is there to use
31565 \begin_inset space ~
31576 \begin_inset space ~
31581 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31584 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31591 \begin_layout Standard
31592 With a bibliography database (see
31593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31595 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31602 ) one has in contrary to the
31606 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31607 These style formats are available:
31610 \begin_layout Description
31612 \begin_inset space ~
31615 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31616 -based approached without any additional packages
31617 (simple numeric citations).
31620 \begin_layout Description
31621 Biblatex loads the package
31626 \begin_inset Index idx
31629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31631 packages ! biblatex
31636 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31638 Biblatex citation style
31642 Biblatex bibliography style
31645 Options to the package
31649 can be entered in the
31656 \begin_layout Description
31658 \begin_inset space ~
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31665 mode) loads the package
31669 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31670 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31682 behavior very closely.
31687 this option has some additional styles.
31692 styles are also supported by this variant.
31695 \begin_layout Description
31697 \begin_inset space ~
31700 (BibTeX) loads the package
31705 \begin_inset Index idx
31708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31715 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31718 \begin_layout Description
31720 \begin_inset space ~
31723 (BibTeX) loads the package
31728 \begin_inset Index idx
31731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31738 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31741 \begin_layout Standard
31750 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31752 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31761 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31763 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31764 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31766 Biblatex citation style
31769 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31775 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31779 \begin_layout Standard
31780 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31781 are available in the
31786 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31787 a name prefix such as
31788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31803 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31808 \begin_inset space \space{}
31812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31823 \begin_layout Standard
31824 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31830 \begin_inset space \space{}
31833 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31839 \begin_inset space \space{}
31843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31855 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31859 \begin_inset space ~
31867 \begin_inset space ~
31873 Here is a simple example where the text
31874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31878 \begin_inset space ~
31882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31885 appears after the reference:
31888 \begin_layout Quote
31890 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31893 key "latexcompanion"
31901 \begin_layout Standard
31902 All styles except for
31906 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31916 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31920 \begin_layout Standard
31921 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31922 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31923 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31928 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31929 multi-citation (so-called
31930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31933 qualified citation lists
31934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31940 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31945 dialog will display three columns in the field
31952 \begin_inset space ~
31960 \begin_inset space ~
31968 \begin_inset space ~
31974 If you double-click on an item's
31977 \begin_inset space ~
31985 \begin_inset space ~
31990 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31993 General text before
31999 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32002 \begin_layout Section
32004 \begin_inset Index idx
32007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32024 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32028 \begin_inset space ~
32033 or the toolbar button
32040 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32041 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32042 by \SpecialChar LyX
32043 as the index entry.
32046 \begin_layout Standard
32047 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32049 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32050 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32052 \begin_inset space ~
32058 A light blue box labeled
32059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32070 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32071 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32075 \begin_layout Standard
32076 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32077 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32078 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32079 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32083 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32091 \begin_layout Subsection
32092 Grouping Index Entries
32093 \begin_inset Index idx
32096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32105 \begin_layout Standard
32106 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32108 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32109 lists under the entry
32110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32118 First we create the entry
32119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32127 \begin_inset space ~
32131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32133 reference "subsec:Lists"
32138 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32139 \begin_inset space ~
32143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32145 reference "sec:Itemize"
32149 , we insert the command
32152 \begin_layout Standard
32158 \begin_layout Standard
32162 \begin_layout Standard
32168 \begin_layout Standard
32169 for the enumerated list in section
32170 \begin_inset space ~
32174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32176 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32183 \begin_layout Standard
32184 The exclamation mark
32185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32192 marks the grouping levels.
32193 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32194 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32195 If we don't have an index entry for
32196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32203 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32206 \begin_layout Subsection
32208 \begin_inset Index idx
32211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32212 Index ! Page ranges
32220 \begin_layout Standard
32221 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32223 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32224 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32225 an index entry in section
32226 \begin_inset space ~
32230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32232 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32239 \begin_layout Standard
32242 Paragraph environments|(
32245 \begin_layout Standard
32246 and another entry at the end of section
32247 \begin_inset space ~
32251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32253 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32260 \begin_layout Standard
32263 Paragraph environments|)
32266 \begin_layout Standard
32268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32291 respectively start and end the index range.
32292 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32293 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32294 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32295 An example is the index entry
32296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32299 Document ! Settings
32300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32306 \begin_layout Subsection
32308 \begin_inset Index idx
32311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32312 Index ! Cross referencing
32320 \begin_layout Standard
32321 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32322 We referred for example in the index entry
32323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32331 \begin_inset space ~
32335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32337 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32341 ) to the index entry
32342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32349 in the same section using the entry
32352 \begin_layout Standard
32355 GIF|see{Image formats}
32358 \begin_layout Standard
32359 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32361 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32362 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32365 \begin_layout Subsection
32367 \begin_inset Index idx
32370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32371 Index ! Entry order
32379 \begin_layout Standard
32380 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32381 follow the rules for the index order.
32382 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32388 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32390 \begin_inset space ~
32394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32396 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32405 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32406 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32431 \begin_inset Index idx
32434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32435 Dummy entries ! maïs
32441 \begin_inset Index idx
32444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32445 Dummy entries ! maître
32451 \begin_inset Index idx
32454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32455 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32460 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32461 maïs, maison, maître.
32462 To achieve this, we use the command
32465 \begin_layout Standard
32468 previous entry@current entry
32471 \begin_layout Standard
32472 In our case we want to have
32473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32488 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32491 \begin_layout Standard
32497 \begin_layout Standard
32498 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32499 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32501 See the next subsection for an example.
32504 \begin_layout Subsection
32506 \begin_inset Index idx
32509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32510 Index ! Entry layout
32518 \begin_layout Standard
32519 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32520 \begin_inset Index idx
32523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32526 This is an italic dummy entry
32531 You can also format the page number using the character
32532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32539 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32540 -command without a backslash.
32541 We can write for example
32544 \begin_layout Standard
32547 italic page number:|textit
32550 \begin_layout Standard
32551 to get the page number in italic.
32552 \begin_inset Index idx
32555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32556 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32561 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32562 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32580 \begin_inset space ~
32586 Have a look at section
32587 \begin_inset space ~
32591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32593 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32597 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32601 \begin_layout Standard
32602 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32610 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32614 to generate the index, see section
32615 \begin_inset space ~
32619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32621 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32630 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32635 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32639 key "latexcompanion"
32652 \begin_layout Standard
32653 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32655 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32656 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32657 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32658 If so, put the following in the preamble
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32673 \begin_layout Standard
32677 \begin_layout Standard
32683 \begin_layout Standard
32684 in the index entry.
32685 \begin_inset Index idx
32688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32689 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32694 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32695 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32696 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32699 \begin_layout Standard
32700 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32701 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32702 a bold font for all index entries.
32703 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32715 documentation for details,
32716 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32718 key "makeindex,xindy"
32726 \begin_layout Subsection
32728 \begin_inset Index idx
32731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32740 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32747 \begin_layout Standard
32748 If the index generation program
32752 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32753 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32757 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32758 distribution, is used.
32762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32767 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32768 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32769 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32770 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32771 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32781 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32783 dialog, see section
32784 \begin_inset space ~
32788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32790 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32795 The available options are listed and explained in
32796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32798 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32804 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32808 \begin_layout Standard
32809 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32810 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32814 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32818 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32819 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32822 \begin_layout Subsection
32826 \begin_layout Standard
32827 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32828 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32836 next to the standard index.
32838 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32839 that add this feature.
32846 \begin_inset Index idx
32849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32851 packages ! splitidx
32856 package to generate multiple indexes.
32857 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32863 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32865 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32873 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32874 style, but it also includes
32875 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32876 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32884 \begin_layout Standard
32885 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32886 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32888 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32889 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32892 and select the option
32894 Use multiple Indexes
32901 already contains the standard index
32902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32910 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32911 also appear as a heading) to the
32915 input field and press the
32920 The new index now also appears in the list.
32921 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32922 label color to the new index.
32925 \begin_layout Standard
32926 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32930 List/Contents/References
32936 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32937 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32938 are additional features:
32941 \begin_layout Itemize
32942 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32943 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32946 \begin_layout Itemize
32947 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32948 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32953 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32954 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32955 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32956 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32959 \begin_layout Itemize
32964 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32965 code in the name of the index.
32968 \begin_layout Section
32969 Nomenclature/Glossary
32970 \begin_inset Index idx
32973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32980 \begin_inset Index idx
32983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33014 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33021 \begin_layout Standard
33022 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33023 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33024 called nomenclature or glossary.
33027 \begin_layout Standard
33028 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33035 \begin_inset Index idx
33038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33046 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33048 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33055 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33059 \begin_layout Standard
33060 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33061 and then use the menu
33063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33069 \begin_inset space ~
33074 or the toolbar button
33077 arg "nomencl-insert"
33082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33093 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33096 \begin_layout Standard
33097 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33098 The first is the term or
33102 that you wish to define.
33107 of the term or symbol.
33110 \begin_layout Standard
33111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33119 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33120 code for nomenclature entries the option
33124 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33132 \begin_layout Subsection
33133 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33134 \begin_inset Index idx
33137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33138 Nomenclature ! Layout
33146 \begin_layout Standard
33147 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33151 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33158 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33166 \begin_inset Newline newline
33174 \begin_inset Newline newline
33180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33187 character starts/ends the formula.
33188 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33189 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33201 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33211 \begin_layout Standard
33212 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33213 syntax is given in section
33214 \begin_inset space ~
33218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33220 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33227 \begin_layout Standard
33231 \begin_inset space ~
33236 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33238 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33243 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33250 in this document is:
33251 \begin_inset Newline newline
33256 dummy entry for the character
33261 \begin_inset Newline newline
33273 \begin_inset space ~
33283 font use the command
33312 \begin_layout Standard
33313 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33318 \begin_inset space \space{}
33322 \begin_inset Newline newline
33338 \begin_inset Newline newline
33341 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33342 This command will make the font of all symbols
33349 \begin_inset space ~
33357 \begin_layout Standard
33358 If the characters |
33359 \begin_inset space \space{}
33363 \begin_inset space \space{}
33367 \begin_inset space \space{}
33371 \begin_inset space \space{}
33375 \begin_inset space \space{}
33378 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33379 code they need to be escaped
33380 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33381 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33382 LatexCommand nomenclature
33383 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33384 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33392 \begin_layout Subsection
33393 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33394 \begin_inset Index idx
33397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33398 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33406 \begin_layout Standard
33407 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33408 -code of the symbol
33410 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33412 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33415 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33416 LatexCommand nomenclature
33418 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33426 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33430 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33431 LatexCommand nomenclature
33434 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33440 They will be sorted by
33441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33467 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33470 will be sorted before the
33474 since the character
33475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33482 is considered in sorting.
33485 \begin_layout Standard
33486 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33489 \begin_inset space ~
33494 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33495 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33497 For the example given, you can insert
33501 in this field for the
33502 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33509 will be located before
33510 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33516 \begin_layout Standard
33517 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33532 \begin_layout Subsection
33533 Nomenclature Options
33534 \begin_inset Index idx
33537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33538 Nomenclature ! Options
33544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33546 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33553 \begin_layout Standard
33558 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33559 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33562 \begin_layout Description
33563 refeq Appends the phrase
33564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33579 to every nomenclature entry, where
33585 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33588 \begin_layout Description
33589 refpage Appends the phrase
33590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33605 to every nomenclature entry, where
33611 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33614 \begin_layout Description
33615 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33618 \begin_layout Standard
33619 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33620 class options list in the
33622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33626 In this document the options
33633 \begin_layout Standard
33634 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33640 \begin_layout Standard
33641 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33642 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33647 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33650 \begin_layout Description
33660 \begin_layout Description
33663 nomrefpage Like the
33670 \begin_layout Description
33673 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33682 \begin_layout Description
33686 \begin_inset space ~
33692 \begin_inset space ~
33697 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33700 \begin_layout Standard
33702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33709 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33710 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33714 \begin_layout Standard
33723 \begin_inset Newline newline
33729 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33733 \begin_inset space ~
33745 unskip, see equation
33748 \begin_inset Newline newline
33755 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33756 \begin_inset Newline newline
33762 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33766 \begin_inset space ~
33783 \begin_layout Standard
33784 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33787 \begin_inset space ~
33792 in the document settings under
33795 \begin_inset space ~
33803 \begin_layout Standard
33811 \begin_inset Newline newline
33815 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33819 \begin_inset space ~
33831 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33833 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33834 \begin_inset Newline newline
33841 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33842 \begin_inset Newline newline
33846 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33850 \begin_inset space ~
33862 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33867 \begin_layout Subsection
33868 Printing the Nomenclature
33869 \begin_inset Index idx
33872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33873 Nomenclature ! Printing
33881 \begin_layout Standard
33882 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33884 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33885 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33901 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33902 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33903 You can choose between these settings:
33906 \begin_layout Description
33907 Default a space of 1
33908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33914 \begin_layout Description
33916 \begin_inset space ~
33920 \begin_inset space ~
33923 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33926 \begin_layout Description
33927 Custom custom space
33930 \begin_layout Standard
33931 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33940 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33948 For example, in order to change the name to
33952 , add the following line to the preamble:
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33968 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33971 \begin_layout Standard
33972 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33973 \begin_inset Newline newline
33988 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33991 \begin_layout Subsection
33992 Nomenclature Program
33993 \begin_inset Index idx
33996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33997 Nomenclature ! Program
34003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34005 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34012 \begin_layout Standard
34018 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34019 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34021 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34026 by adding options, see section
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34033 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34038 The available options are listed and explained in
34039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34041 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34049 \begin_layout Section
34051 \begin_inset Index idx
34054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34061 \begin_inset Index idx
34064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34065 Document ! Branches
34071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34073 name "sec:Branches"
34080 \begin_layout Standard
34081 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34082 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34083 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34084 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34087 \begin_layout Standard
34088 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34089 allows you to put text into branches.
34090 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34091 To create a branch, either select the menu
34093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34094 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34097 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34106 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34107 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34108 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34109 and whether the name of the branch should
34110 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34111 (see below for an example).
34112 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34113 to the name of the other) and to add
34114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34126 \begin_inset space ~
34129 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34130 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34133 \begin_layout Standard
34134 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34135 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34140 where you can choose a branch.
34141 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34145 \begin_layout Standard
34146 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34147 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34151 \begin_inset Branch Question
34155 \begin_layout Standard
34160 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34168 \begin_layout Standard
34169 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34178 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34186 \begin_layout Standard
34193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34194 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34197 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34198 Consider for example a file
34199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34206 which has the above branches.
34208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34215 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34239 branch were inactive,
34240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34255 branch was active, likewise
34256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34271 branch was active, and
34272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34275 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34279 if both branches were active.
34280 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34281 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34287 \begin_layout Standard
34288 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34294 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34295 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34299 \begin_inset space ~
34307 \begin_layout Standard
34308 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34325 branch is deactivated.
34331 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34337 \begin_layout Standard
34338 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34339 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34340 definitions for each branch.
34341 For example you can define for the question branch
34345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34346 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34347 -syntax, see section
34348 \begin_inset space ~
34352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34354 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34376 \begin_layout Standard
34386 \begin_layout Standard
34387 and for the answer branch
34390 \begin_layout Standard
34400 \begin_layout Standard
34410 \begin_layout Standard
34411 \begin_inset Branch Question
34415 \begin_layout Standard
34419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34447 \begin_layout Standard
34448 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34452 \begin_layout Standard
34456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34484 \begin_layout Standard
34485 Now it is possible to use the
34489 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34496 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34499 commands to obtain conditional output.
34500 Here is an example formula where only the
34507 \begin_inset Formula
34509 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34517 \begin_layout Standard
34518 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34526 \begin_layout Standard
34527 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34533 \begin_inset space \space{}
34536 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34538 For this advanced usage, see the
34544 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34549 \begin_layout Section
34551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34553 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34558 \begin_inset Index idx
34561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34570 \begin_layout Standard
34573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34574 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34577 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34579 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34585 \begin_inset Index idx
34588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34590 packages ! hyperref
34595 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34596 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34597 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34598 part of the document.
34602 \begin_layout Standard
34603 The header information in the dialog tab
34607 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34608 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34609 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34610 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34618 \begin_inset space ~
34623 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34624 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34625 and author entries.
34629 \begin_inset space ~
34633 \begin_inset space ~
34637 \begin_inset space ~
34642 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34646 You can specify in the dialog tab
34650 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34655 \begin_inset space ~
34659 \begin_inset space ~
34663 \begin_inset space ~
34668 option allows long links to be split;
34671 \begin_inset space ~
34675 \begin_inset space ~
34679 \begin_inset space ~
34687 \begin_inset space ~
34692 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34695 \begin_inset space ~
34700 colors the different links.
34701 The default colors are:
34704 \begin_layout Labeling
34705 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34710 for hyperlinks and URLs
34713 \begin_layout Labeling
34714 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34722 \begin_layout Labeling
34723 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34731 \begin_layout Standard
34732 but you can change these in the field
34737 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34740 \begin_layout Standard
34743 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34746 \begin_layout Standard
34751 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34752 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34753 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34761 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34762 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34763 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34773 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34774 when opening the PDF.
34776 \begin_inset space ~
34779 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34780 \begin_inset space ~
34783 1 will only display the sections.
34786 \begin_layout Standard
34787 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34788 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34794 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34805 \begin_layout Section
34807 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34811 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34818 \begin_layout Subsection
34821 \begin_inset Index idx
34824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34834 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34841 \begin_layout Standard
34842 As \SpecialChar LyX
34843 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34844 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34845 commands and constructs,
34848 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34849 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34850 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34851 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34852 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34853 cannot support all packages and
34857 \begin_layout Standard
34858 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34859 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34860 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34864 Code box is created by the menu
34866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34868 \begin_inset space ~
34873 or by the toolbar button
34886 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34894 \begin_layout Standard
34895 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34897 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34899 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34904 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34909 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34916 , you can write the command part
34922 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34923 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34927 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34928 Code box behind the word.
34929 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34930 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34934 \begin_layout Standard
34935 \begin_inset Graphics
34936 filename clipart/ERT.png
34944 \begin_layout Standard
34948 \begin_layout Standard
34949 This is a line with a
34953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34976 \begin_layout Standard
34977 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34985 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34986 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34987 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34988 know that the command is finished.
34996 \begin_layout Subsection
34997 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34999 \begin_inset Argument 1
35002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35003 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35010 \begin_inset Index idx
35013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35023 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35030 \begin_layout Standard
35031 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35032 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35033 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35034 uses in the background.
35035 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35036 is based on commands, you can
35037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35045 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35046 any time if you know the right commands.
35047 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35048 is the end of the day.
35049 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35050 all caption labels bold.
35051 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35053 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35057 \begin_layout Standard
35058 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35060 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35062 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35065 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35075 \begin_layout Standard
35076 As result you find that the package
35081 \begin_inset Index idx
35084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35092 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35097 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35109 \begin_layout Standard
35114 usepackage[options]{package name}
35117 \begin_layout Standard
35118 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35119 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35120 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35121 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35124 \begin_layout Standard
35125 In your case the package name is
35130 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35135 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35136 So you add the command
35139 \begin_layout Standard
35144 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35147 \begin_layout Standard
35148 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35153 For more commands provided by the
35157 package, have a look at its documentation,
35158 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35173 \begin_layout Standard
35174 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35176 For example if you use a
35180 class, you don't need the package
35184 , you can instead write
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35192 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35197 \begin_layout Standard
35198 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35199 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35200 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35207 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35210 \begin_layout Standard
35211 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35212 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35214 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35215 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35216 Code box as described in the previous
35220 \begin_layout Standard
35221 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35222 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35225 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35227 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35235 \begin_layout Standard
35236 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35242 \begin_layout Standard
35246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35256 \begin_inset Note Note
35259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35260 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35268 \begin_layout Left Header
35269 \begin_inset Argument 1
35272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35292 \begin_inset Note Note
35295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35296 defines the header line as described below
35304 \begin_layout Center Header
35305 \begin_inset Argument 1
35308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35317 \begin_layout Right Header
35318 \begin_inset Argument 1
35321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35342 \begin_layout Left Footer
35343 \begin_inset Argument 1
35346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35367 \begin_layout Center Footer
35368 \begin_inset Argument 1
35371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35383 \begin_inset Newline newline
35387 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35393 \begin_layout Right Footer
35394 \begin_inset Argument 1
35397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35419 \begin_layout Section
35420 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35423 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35428 \begin_inset Index idx
35431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35432 Document ! Header/Footer line
35438 \begin_inset Index idx
35441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35450 \begin_layout Standard
35451 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35455 \begin_inset space ~
35466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35472 \begin_inset space ~
35478 As a second step add in the menu
35480 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35481 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35490 Custom Header/Footerlines
35493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35497 This module offers the following 6
35498 \begin_inset space ~
35504 \begin_layout Description
35506 \begin_inset space ~
35510 \begin_inset space ~
35514 \begin_inset space ~
35518 \begin_inset space ~
35522 \begin_inset space ~
35528 \begin_layout Description
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35534 \begin_inset space ~
35538 \begin_inset space ~
35542 \begin_inset space ~
35546 \begin_inset space ~
35552 \begin_layout Standard
35553 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35554 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35557 \begin_layout Standard
35558 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35559 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35561 \begin_inset space ~
35565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35567 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35571 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35574 \begin_layout Standard
35575 \begin_inset Float figure
35582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35585 \begin_inset Tabular
35586 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35587 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35588 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35589 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35590 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35610 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35621 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35639 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35650 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35654 The normal text on the page goes here.
35655 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35657 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35658 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35663 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35672 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35683 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35701 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35712 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35730 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35748 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35753 name "fig:Page-layout"
35757 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35770 \begin_layout Standard
35771 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35779 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35783 \begin_inset space ~
35788 is set to “Default”.
35789 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35798 \begin_layout Subsection
35802 \begin_layout Standard
35803 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35804 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35805 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35806 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35808 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35810 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35814 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35815 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35821 \begin_inset space ~
35829 \begin_layout Description
35832 thepage prints the current page number
35835 \begin_layout Description
35838 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35841 \begin_layout Description
35844 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35847 \begin_layout Description
35850 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35851 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35858 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35861 because it usually goes in a left header.
35864 \begin_layout Description
35867 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35868 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35870 It is normally used in the right header.
35873 \begin_layout Subsection
35874 Default header/footer
35877 \begin_layout Standard
35878 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35879 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35880 footer has the page number.
35881 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35882 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35883 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35886 \begin_inset space ~
35894 \begin_layout Subsection
35898 \begin_layout Standard
35899 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35900 Some pages are different.
35901 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35902 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35903 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35904 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35905 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35909 Header and footer decoration line
35912 \begin_layout Standard
35913 By default, you get a 0.4
35914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35917 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35918 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35930 in the following way:
35933 \begin_layout Standard
35940 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35943 \begin_layout Standard
35944 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35957 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35964 \begin_layout Standard
35965 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35967 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35972 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35983 Several header/footer lines
35986 \begin_layout Standard
35987 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35988 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35989 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35991 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36007 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36009 \begin_inset space ~
36017 \begin_layout Standard
36024 headheight}{height}
36027 \begin_layout Standard
36032 is a size in standard units (e.
36033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36037 \begin_inset space \space{}
36045 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36046 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36047 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36048 logfile with the menu
36050 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36052 \begin_inset space ~
36060 \begin_inset space ~
36065 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36070 \begin_inset Index idx
36073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36075 packages ! fancyhdr
36081 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36082 for your header/footer.
36085 \begin_layout Subsection
36089 \begin_layout Standard
36090 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36091 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36092 This example consists of the following definition:
36095 \begin_layout Description
36097 \begin_inset space ~
36106 , empty optional argument
36109 \begin_layout Description
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36114 Header empty, empty optional argument
36117 \begin_layout Description
36119 \begin_inset space ~
36128 in the optional argument
36131 \begin_layout Description
36133 \begin_inset space ~
36142 in the optional argument
36145 \begin_layout Description
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36164 \begin_inset Newline newline
36168 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36175 in the optional argument
36178 \begin_layout Description
36180 \begin_inset space ~
36189 , empty optional argument
36192 \begin_layout Description
36195 headrulewidth set to 2
36196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36202 \begin_layout Standard
36203 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36204 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36210 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36220 \begin_layout Standard
36221 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36227 \begin_layout Standard
36231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 pagestyle{headings}
36241 \begin_inset Note Note
36244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 switches back to page style with the default headings
36253 \begin_layout Section
36254 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36257 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36262 \begin_inset Index idx
36265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36272 \begin_inset Index idx
36275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36284 \begin_layout Standard
36286 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36287 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36288 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36291 \begin_layout Subsection
36295 \begin_layout Standard
36296 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36302 \begin_inset Index idx
36305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36307 packages ! preview-latex
36312 (on some systems named simply
36317 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36319 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36326 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36328 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36336 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36337 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36338 -package are automatically
36339 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36343 \begin_layout Subsection
36347 \begin_layout Standard
36348 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36349 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36351 activate the option
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36361 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36371 \begin_inset space ~
36374 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36381 \begin_inset space ~
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36399 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36402 \begin_layout Standard
36403 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36424 \begin_layout Standard
36425 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36426 and when you finish
36430 \begin_layout Standard
36431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36439 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36440 generated by activating the option
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36449 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36457 \begin_layout Subsection
36458 Selected document parts
36461 \begin_layout Standard
36462 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36463 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36464 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36465 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36467 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36473 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36474 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36475 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36478 \begin_layout Standard
36479 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36486 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36498 is explained in section
36500 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36505 \begin_inset space ~
36515 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36516 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36517 the final rotated boxes,
36518 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36519 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36521 Here is the result:
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36525 \begin_inset Preview
36527 \begin_layout Standard
36532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36536 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36542 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36552 height_special "totalheight"
36557 backgroundcolor "none"
36560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36585 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36591 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36613 \begin_layout Standard
36614 Previewing works also for colors.
36615 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36634 is explained in section
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36654 \begin_layout Standard
36655 \begin_inset Preview
36657 \begin_layout Standard
36661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36680 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36685 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36704 \begin_layout Standard
36705 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36711 \begin_layout Standard
36712 If \SpecialChar LyX
36713 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36714 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36715 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36716 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36717 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36718 the \SpecialChar TeX
36720 If \SpecialChar LyX
36721 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36722 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36724 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36725 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36726 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36729 \begin_layout Subsection
36734 \begin_layout Standard
36735 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36736 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36739 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36741 \begin_inset space ~
36746 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36748 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36750 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36751 's main window, then only this selection
36752 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36753 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36754 the source view window.
36759 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36760 ; but note that if you have
36761 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36763 not just the one which is open at the time.
36766 \begin_layout Section
36767 Advanced Find and Replace
36768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36770 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36775 \begin_inset Index idx
36778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36785 \begin_inset Index idx
36788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36797 \begin_layout Subsection
36801 \begin_layout Standard
36802 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36803 allows for searching of complex,
36804 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36806 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36807 The key-features are:
36810 \begin_layout Itemize
36811 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36812 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36813 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36817 \begin_layout Itemize
36818 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36819 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36820 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36821 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36824 \begin_layout Itemize
36825 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36826 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36827 outside of mathematics environments
36830 \begin_layout Itemize
36831 Search may be widened to a specific
36836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36843 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36844 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36851 \begin_layout Itemize
36852 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36853 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36858 \begin_inset space ~
36861 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36864 \begin_layout Subsection
36868 \begin_layout Standard
36869 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36871 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36884 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36887 ) or the toolbar button
36890 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36896 Advanced Find and Replace
36901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36905 \begin_layout Standard
36911 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36915 \begin_inset space ~
36920 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36923 arg "paragraph-break"
36927 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36928 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36932 arg "paragraph-break"
36935 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36939 searches backwards.
36942 \begin_layout Standard
36946 \begin_inset space ~
36951 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36960 \begin_inset space ~
36965 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36969 Searching for mathematics
36972 \begin_layout Standard
36973 Mathematical formulas, such as
36974 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36977 or something more complex like
36978 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36981 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36986 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36987 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36988 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36989 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36995 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36999 \begin_layout Standard
37000 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37001 This is done by switching to the
37005 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37010 This way, entering in the
37017 \begin_layout Itemize
37018 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37019 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37022 \begin_layout Itemize
37023 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37024 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37027 \begin_layout Itemize
37028 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37029 of it only within section headings.
37030 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37031 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37035 \begin_layout Itemize
37036 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37037 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37044 \begin_layout Standard
37045 The entries made in the
37049 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37052 \begin_inset space ~
37058 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37062 button or alternatively press
37065 arg "paragraph-break"
37072 while the cursor is in the
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37083 \begin_layout Standard
37084 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37086 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37090 \begin_layout Itemize
37091 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37092 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37100 with its typewriter version
37101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37115 \begin_layout Itemize
37116 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37122 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37134 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37141 (you may want to enable the
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37152 \begin_inset space ~
37157 options and disable the
37165 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37173 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37174 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37178 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37181 , or occurrences of
37182 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37186 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37192 \begin_layout Subsection
37196 \begin_layout Standard
37197 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37202 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37204 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37206 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37216 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37222 This is done with the context menu
37224 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37225 Insert Regular Expression
37227 while the cursor is in the
37232 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37233 expression matching rules
37237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37238 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37245 \begin_inset space ~
37248 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37249 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37255 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37256 same text in the document.
37257 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37258 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37261 \begin_layout Enumerate
37262 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37267 editor the fraction
37268 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37272 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37275 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37276 fractions with the given denominator.
37279 \begin_layout Enumerate
37280 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37292 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37297 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37298 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37299 Also, by inserting a
37300 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37303 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37304 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37307 \begin_layout Standard
37308 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37309 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37310 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37313 , and referring back to them through
37314 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37318 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37322 For example, try searching with the regexp
37323 \begin_inset Newline newline
37326 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37329 \begin_inset Newline newline
37332 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37335 \begin_layout Standard
37336 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37339 \begin_layout Standard
37340 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37348 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37349 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37350 sub-expressions is absolute.
37352 \begin_inset space ~
37356 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37359 always refers to the first occurrence of
37360 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37363 in all entered regexps.
37371 \begin_layout Section
37373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37375 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37380 \begin_inset Index idx
37383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37392 \begin_layout Standard
37394 has a built-in spell checker.
37397 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37404 key or the toolbar button
37407 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37410 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37411 beginning of the currently selected text.
37412 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37413 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37414 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37415 scrolled so that it is visible.
37416 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37417 n, if any could be found.
37418 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37422 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37423 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37426 \begin_layout Standard
37427 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37430 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37434 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37435 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37437 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37438 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37441 \begin_inset space ~
37449 arg "dialog-show character"
37452 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37454 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37457 \begin_layout Standard
37458 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37459 can be downloaded from here:
37460 \begin_inset Newline newline
37464 \begin_inset Flex URL
37467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37469 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37475 \begin_inset Newline newline
37479 \begin_inset space ~
37482 files for each language.
37483 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37484 \begin_inset space ~
37487 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37488 's installation subfolder
37496 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37498 \begin_inset Newline newline
37501 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37502 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37503 but in most cases these are
37519 is the language code.
37522 \begin_layout Subsection
37526 \begin_layout Standard
37529 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37530 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37535 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37538 you can set the following things:
37541 \begin_layout Description
37543 \begin_inset space ~
37546 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37547 should use for spell checking.
37548 Depending on your platform,
37558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37559 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37560 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37575 \begin_inset space ~
37578 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37581 \begin_layout Description
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37586 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37587 will always use the given language
37588 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37591 \begin_layout Description
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37596 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37602 \begin_inset space \space{}
37606 This should normally not be needed.
37609 \begin_layout Description
37611 \begin_inset space ~
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37618 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37630 \begin_layout Description
37632 \begin_inset space ~
37635 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37636 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37637 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37638 appear in a context menu.
37639 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37643 \begin_layout Description
37645 \begin_inset space ~
37649 \begin_inset space ~
37653 \begin_inset space ~
37656 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37660 \begin_layout Section
37662 \begin_inset Index idx
37665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37674 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37681 \begin_layout Standard
37683 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37684 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37694 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37696 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37706 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37708 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37709 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37710 which are available for many languages.
37713 \begin_layout Standard
37714 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37715 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37719 \begin_layout Subsection
37720 Setting up the thesaurus
37723 \begin_layout Standard
37732 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37736 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37741 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37747 \begin_inset space ~
37755 For instance, the US English files are named:
37758 \begin_layout Itemize
37762 \begin_layout Itemize
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37775 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37776 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37779 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37780 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37781 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37788 ) to the path where they are installed.
37792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37793 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37794 ies, typical locations are
37800 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37804 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37808 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37811 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37817 LibreOffice-<Version>
37824 On the Mac, the default location is
37826 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37827 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37828 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37829 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37830 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37831 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37839 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37840 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37841 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37847 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37849 \begin_inset Newline newline
37853 \begin_inset Flex URL
37856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37858 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37866 \begin_layout Standard
37867 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37868 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37870 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37871 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37872 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37874 \begin_inset space ~
37879 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37881 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37882 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37886 \begin_layout Standard
37887 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37889 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37892 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37898 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37901 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37902 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37910 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37911 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37912 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37914 \begin_inset space ~
37919 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37922 \begin_layout Subsection
37923 Using the thesaurus
37926 \begin_layout Standard
37927 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37929 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37932 or the toolbar button
37935 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37938 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37940 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37942 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37943 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37944 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37953 ), related terms (such as
37956 \begin_inset space ~
37965 ), compounds (such as
37968 \begin_inset space ~
37977 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37986 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37989 \begin_layout Standard
37990 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37991 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37995 \begin_layout Standard
37996 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37997 the dictionary, such as the above
38001 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38006 \begin_inset space \space{}
38009 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38010 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38011 For example, looking up the word form
38015 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38020 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38025 \begin_inset space \space{}
38036 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38037 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38038 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38041 \begin_layout Section
38043 \begin_inset Index idx
38046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38053 \begin_inset Index idx
38056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38057 Document ! Change Tracking
38063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38065 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38072 \begin_layout Standard
38073 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38074 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38075 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38076 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38078 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38080 \begin_inset space ~
38083 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38085 \begin_inset space ~
38093 \begin_layout Standard
38094 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38108 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38109 You can change the color in
38111 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38112 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38114 \begin_inset space ~
38118 \begin_inset space ~
38123 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38129 \begin_inset Index idx
38132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38133 Color ! Change tracking
38138 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38139 's status bar when the
38140 cursor is in changed text.
38141 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38144 arg "changes-merge"
38150 \begin_layout Standard
38151 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38153 \begin_inset Index idx
38156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38165 \begin_layout Standard
38166 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38172 \begin_layout Standard
38173 \begin_inset Graphics
38174 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38183 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38190 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38193 \begin_layout Standard
38194 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38200 \begin_layout Standard
38201 \begin_inset Tabular
38202 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38203 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38204 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38205 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38215 arg "changes-track"
38223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38231 \begin_inset space ~
38234 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38236 \begin_inset space ~
38245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38254 arg "changes-output"
38262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38270 \begin_inset space ~
38273 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38275 \begin_inset space ~
38279 \begin_inset space ~
38283 \begin_inset space ~
38292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38313 Jumps to the next change
38319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38328 arg "change-accept"
38336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38342 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38344 \begin_inset space ~
38347 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38349 \begin_inset space ~
38358 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38367 arg "change-reject"
38375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38381 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38383 \begin_inset space ~
38386 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38388 \begin_inset space ~
38397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38406 arg "changes-merge"
38414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38422 \begin_inset space ~
38425 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38427 \begin_inset space ~
38436 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38445 arg "all-changes-accept"
38453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38459 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38461 \begin_inset space ~
38464 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38466 \begin_inset space ~
38470 \begin_inset space ~
38479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38488 arg "all-changes-reject"
38496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38504 \begin_inset space ~
38507 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38509 \begin_inset space ~
38513 \begin_inset space ~
38522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38546 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38548 \begin_inset space ~
38557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38580 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38598 \begin_layout Standard
38599 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38605 \begin_layout Standard
38606 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38626 \begin_layout Standard
38627 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38628 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38629 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38630 the next change after the current cursor position.
38631 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38632 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38633 step to the next change.
38634 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38637 \begin_layout Standard
38638 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38639 to describe a change.
38642 \begin_layout Standard
38644 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38645 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38651 \begin_inset Index idx
38654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38662 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38671 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38677 \begin_layout Section
38678 Comparison of Documents
38679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38681 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38686 \begin_inset Index idx
38689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38690 Comparison of documents
38698 \begin_layout Standard
38699 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38702 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38706 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38707 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38709 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38711 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38715 \begin_inset space ~
38719 \begin_inset space ~
38723 \begin_inset space ~
38732 \begin_inset space ~
38736 \begin_inset space ~
38740 \begin_inset space ~
38744 \begin_inset space ~
38748 \begin_inset space ~
38752 \begin_inset space ~
38757 enables the change tracking option
38760 \begin_inset space ~
38764 \begin_inset space ~
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38773 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38776 \begin_layout Section
38777 International Support
38778 \begin_inset Index idx
38781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38782 International support
38790 \begin_layout Standard
38791 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38792 with any language you want.
38793 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38794 up \SpecialChar LyX
38796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38798 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38806 \begin_layout Standard
38807 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38808 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38809 \begin_inset space ~
38813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38815 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38822 \begin_layout Subsection
38824 \begin_inset Index idx
38827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38834 \begin_inset Index idx
38837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38838 Document ! Settings
38844 \begin_inset Index idx
38847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38848 Document ! Language
38856 \begin_layout Standard
38859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38860 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38863 dialog lets you set
38865 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38870 \begin_layout Standard
38875 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38880 \begin_inset space ~
38885 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38886 For details about the different encoding options see section
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38893 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38900 \begin_layout Subsection
38901 Keyboard mapping configuration
38902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38904 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38911 \begin_layout Standard
38912 If you have for example a U.
38913 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38916 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38917 can use an alternate keymap.
38918 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38923 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38924 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38925 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38928 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38929 \begin_inset space ~
38933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38935 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38940 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38941 which one you want to use.
38944 \begin_layout Standard
38945 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38946 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38947 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38951 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38952 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38953 one to support the characters you want.
38954 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38961 \begin_layout Chapter
38964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38966 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38973 \begin_layout Standard
38974 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38975 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38976 topic inside the user's guide.
38979 \begin_layout Section
38981 \begin_inset Index idx
38984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38993 \begin_layout Standard
38998 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39001 \begin_layout Subsection
39005 \begin_layout Standard
39006 Creates a new document.
39009 \begin_layout Subsection
39013 \begin_layout Standard
39014 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39015 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39016 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39018 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39019 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39025 \begin_layout Subsection
39029 \begin_layout Standard
39033 \begin_layout Subsection
39037 \begin_layout Standard
39038 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39039 Click there on a file to open it.
39042 \begin_layout Subsection
39044 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39048 \begin_layout Standard
39050 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39051 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39055 \begin_layout Subsection
39059 \begin_layout Standard
39060 Closes the current document.
39063 \begin_layout Subsection
39067 \begin_layout Standard
39068 Closes all opened documents.
39071 \begin_layout Subsection
39075 \begin_layout Standard
39076 Saves the actual document.
39079 \begin_layout Subsection
39083 \begin_layout Standard
39084 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39085 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39089 \begin_layout Subsection
39091 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39095 \begin_layout Standard
39097 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39098 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39104 \begin_layout Subsection
39108 \begin_layout Standard
39109 Saves all opened documents.
39112 \begin_layout Subsection
39116 \begin_layout Standard
39117 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39120 \begin_layout Subsection
39124 \begin_layout Standard
39125 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39126 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39127 It is described in the section
39129 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39134 Additional Features
39139 \begin_layout Subsection
39143 \begin_layout Standard
39144 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39145 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39147 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39148 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39152 \begin_layout Standard
39153 When using the menu entry
39156 \begin_inset space ~
39161 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39173 \begin_inset space ~
39178 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39179 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39182 \begin_layout Subsection
39184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39186 name "subsec:Export"
39193 \begin_layout Standard
39194 You can export your document to various file formats.
39195 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39197 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39198 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39199 during its configuration.
39202 \begin_layout Standard
39203 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39205 \begin_inset space ~
39209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39211 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39218 \begin_layout Description
39224 \begin_inset space ~
39227 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39229 \begin_inset space ~
39232 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39233 \begin_inset Newline newline
39236 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39237 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39241 \begin_layout Description
39242 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39248 \begin_layout Description
39250 \begin_inset space ~
39253 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39259 \begin_layout Description
39260 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39261 's native DVI-format.
39262 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39263 files paths or file names in your document.
39265 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39272 \begin_layout Description
39273 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39274 in files paths or file names
39277 \begin_layout Description
39279 \begin_inset space ~
39286 ) DVI-format using the program
39288 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39291 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39295 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39303 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39311 \begin_layout Description
39313 \begin_inset space ~
39316 (cropped) the same as
39320 but with cropped page margins.
39323 \begin_layout Description
39325 \begin_inset space ~
39328 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39332 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39337 \begin_layout Description
39341 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39349 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39357 \begin_layout Description
39359 \begin_inset space ~
39363 \begin_inset space ~
39366 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39370 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39378 \begin_layout Description
39382 \begin_inset space ~
39391 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39392 source that is compilable with the program
39394 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39398 \begin_layout Description
39402 \begin_inset space ~
39407 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39408 source, additionally all images used in the document
39409 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39413 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39416 \begin_layout Description
39420 \begin_inset space ~
39425 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39426 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39427 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39435 \begin_layout Description
39439 \begin_inset space ~
39448 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39449 source that is compilable with the program
39455 \begin_layout Description
39457 \begin_inset space ~
39461 \begin_inset space ~
39468 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39469 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39475 \begin_layout Description
39477 \begin_inset space ~
39480 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39481 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39487 \begin_inset space \space{}
39492 \begin_inset space ~
39496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39511 represent the version number)
39514 \begin_layout Description
39516 \begin_inset space ~
39520 \begin_inset space ~
39523 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39524 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39525 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39529 \begin_layout Description
39530 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39531 's internal XHTML engine
39534 \begin_layout Description
39536 \begin_inset space ~
39540 \begin_inset space ~
39544 \begin_inset space ~
39548 \begin_inset space ~
39551 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39556 For the conversion the program
39565 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39568 \begin_layout Description
39569 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39574 \begin_layout Description
39576 \begin_inset space ~
39579 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39581 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39584 For the conversion the program
39593 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39596 \begin_layout Description
39598 \begin_inset space ~
39601 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39602 For the conversion the program
39611 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39614 \begin_layout Description
39616 \begin_inset space ~
39619 (cropped) the same as
39622 \begin_inset space ~
39627 but with cropped page margins
39630 \begin_layout Description
39634 \begin_inset space ~
39639 PDF-format using the program
39643 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39646 \begin_layout Description
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39654 \begin_inset space ~
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39667 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39672 \begin_inset space \space{}
39675 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39679 \begin_layout Description
39683 \begin_inset space ~
39688 PDF-format using the program
39690 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39693 , produces PDF-files directly
39696 \begin_layout Description
39700 \begin_inset space ~
39705 PDF-format using the program
39709 , produces PDF-files directly
39712 \begin_layout Description
39716 \begin_inset space ~
39721 PDF-format using the program
39725 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39728 \begin_layout Description
39732 \begin_inset space ~
39737 PDF-format using the program
39742 , produces PDF-files directly
39745 \begin_layout Description
39749 \begin_inset space ~
39757 \begin_layout Description
39761 \begin_inset space ~
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39770 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39771 and then exported as text using the program
39776 \begin_layout Description
39781 PostScript format using the program
39789 options see section
39790 \begin_inset space ~
39794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39796 reference "subsec:General-output"
39803 \begin_layout Description
39804 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39805 source and also code in the statistical programming
39819 it is possible to use
39823 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39827 \begin_layout Standard
39828 If one of the menu entries
39835 \begin_inset space ~
39844 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39846 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39848 \begin_inset space ~
39852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39854 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39859 \begin_inset Index idx
39862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39863 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39872 \begin_layout Subsection
39876 \begin_layout Standard
39877 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39878 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39881 \begin_inset space ~
39885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39887 reference "sec:Paths"
39892 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39901 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39902 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39903 's preferences as described in section
39904 \begin_inset space ~
39908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39910 reference "subsec:Converters"
39917 \begin_layout Subsection
39918 New and Close Window
39921 \begin_layout Standard
39922 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39926 \begin_layout Subsection
39930 \begin_layout Standard
39931 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39934 \begin_layout Section
39936 \begin_inset Index idx
39939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39948 \begin_layout Subsection
39952 \begin_layout Standard
39953 Described in section
39954 \begin_inset space ~
39958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39960 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39967 \begin_layout Subsection
39968 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39971 \begin_layout Standard
39972 Described in section
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39979 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39986 \begin_layout Subsection
39990 \begin_layout Standard
39991 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39992 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39995 \begin_layout Subsection
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40000 Selects the whole document.
40003 \begin_layout Subsection
40004 Find & Replace (Quick)
40007 \begin_layout Standard
40008 Described in section
40009 \begin_inset space ~
40013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40015 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40022 \begin_layout Subsection
40023 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40026 \begin_layout Standard
40027 Described in section
40028 \begin_inset space ~
40032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40034 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40041 \begin_layout Subsection
40042 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40045 \begin_layout Standard
40046 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40050 \begin_layout Subsection
40052 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40056 \begin_layout Standard
40058 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40059 Described in section
40060 \begin_inset space ~
40064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40066 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40075 \begin_layout Subsection
40077 \begin_inset Index idx
40080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40081 Paragraph ! Settings
40089 \begin_layout Standard
40090 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40091 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40095 \begin_layout Standard
40096 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40097 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40104 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40106 \begin_inset space ~
40112 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40116 \begin_layout Subsection
40118 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40122 \begin_layout Standard
40124 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40125 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40130 \begin_layout Enumerate
40132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40133 Customize text properties by means of the
40139 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40142 ; this is described in section
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40149 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40156 \begin_layout Enumerate
40158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40159 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40161 Apply last settings
40164 \begin_layout Enumerate
40166 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40167 Change the casing of selected text (
40182 \begin_layout Subsection
40184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40188 \begin_layout Standard
40190 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40191 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40192 text styles (in the case of this document:
40214 \begin_inset space ~
40218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40220 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40229 \begin_layout Subsection
40230 Table and Rows & Columns
40233 \begin_layout Standard
40234 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40235 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40236 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40239 \begin_layout Subsection
40243 \begin_layout Standard
40244 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40245 It will dissolve this inset.
40246 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40250 \begin_layout Subsection
40254 \begin_layout Standard
40255 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40256 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40259 \begin_layout Subsection
40260 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40263 \begin_layout Standard
40264 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40266 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40267 \begin_inset space ~
40271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40273 reference "sec:Nesting"
40278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40280 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40287 \begin_layout Section
40289 \begin_inset Index idx
40292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40301 \begin_layout Standard
40302 At the bottom of the
40306 menu the opened documents are listed.
40309 \begin_layout Subsection
40310 Open/Close all Insets
40313 \begin_layout Standard
40314 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40317 \begin_layout Subsection
40318 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40321 \begin_layout Standard
40322 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40325 \begin_layout Standard
40326 Math macros are described in the
40333 \begin_layout Subsection
40337 \begin_layout Standard
40338 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40339 \begin_inset space ~
40343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40345 reference "sec:Navigating"
40350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40352 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40359 \begin_layout Subsection
40363 \begin_layout Standard
40364 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40372 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40379 \begin_layout Subsection
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40384 Opens a window showing console messages.
40385 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40390 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40391 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40392 is processing the document.
40395 \begin_layout Subsection
40397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40399 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40404 \begin_inset Index idx
40407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40416 \begin_layout Standard
40417 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40419 All toolbars and the
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40427 can be turned on and off.
40432 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40444 \begin_inset space ~
40456 \begin_inset space ~
40461 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40465 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40472 \begin_layout Standard
40477 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40481 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40482 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40483 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40484 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40485 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40488 \begin_layout Standard
40490 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40491 \begin_inset space ~
40495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40497 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40504 \begin_layout Subsection
40508 \begin_layout Standard
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_inset space ~
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40528 \begin_inset space ~
40532 \begin_inset space ~
40537 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40538 's main window vertically while
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40545 \begin_inset space ~
40549 \begin_inset space ~
40553 \begin_inset space ~
40557 \begin_inset space ~
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40566 will split it horizontally.
40567 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40568 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40569 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40570 three or more documents at the same time.
40571 To close a split view, use the menu
40574 \begin_inset space ~
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40586 \begin_layout Subsection
40590 \begin_layout Standard
40591 Closes a split view.
40594 \begin_layout Subsection
40598 \begin_layout Standard
40599 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40600 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40601 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40602 's main window fullscreen.
40603 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40604 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40607 \begin_layout Section
40609 \begin_inset Index idx
40612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40621 \begin_layout Subsection
40625 \begin_layout Standard
40626 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40627 \begin_inset space ~
40631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40633 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40644 \begin_layout Subsection
40646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40648 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40656 Here you can insert the following characters:
40659 \begin_layout Description
40664 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40667 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40668 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40669 -packages you have installed.
40670 You can get a complete display by checking
40673 \begin_inset space ~
40679 \begin_inset Newline newline
40683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40691 Not all characters will be visible in the
40695 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40696 dialog (see section
40697 \begin_inset space ~
40701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40703 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40707 ) can display every character.
40715 \begin_layout Description
40716 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40720 \begin_layout Description
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40726 \begin_inset space ~
40729 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40736 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40743 \begin_layout Description
40745 \begin_inset space ~
40748 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40752 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40758 \begin_layout Description
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40763 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40766 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40767 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40773 \begin_layout Description
40775 \begin_inset space ~
40778 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40782 \begin_layout Description
40784 \begin_inset space ~
40787 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40791 \begin_layout Description
40793 \begin_inset space ~
40797 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
40798 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
40804 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40809 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40815 \begin_inset space \space{}
40818 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40819 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40828 To insert a fraction use the command
40833 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40837 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40846 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40853 \begin_layout Description
40855 \begin_inset space ~
40858 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40862 \begin_layout Description
40864 \begin_inset space ~
40868 \begin_inset Index idx
40871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40878 \begin_inset Index idx
40881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40882 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40887 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40888 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40890 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40896 \begin_inset Index idx
40899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40907 \begin_inset Newline newline
40910 More information about this feature can be found in the
40916 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40922 \begin_layout Description
40923 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40925 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40926 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40930 \begin_layout Subsection
40934 \begin_layout Standard
40935 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40938 \begin_layout Description
40939 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40940 \begin_inset script superscript
40942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40951 \begin_layout Description
40952 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40953 \begin_inset script subscript
40955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40964 \begin_layout Description
40966 \begin_inset space ~
40969 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40970 \begin_inset space ~
40974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40976 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40983 \begin_layout Description
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40988 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40995 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41002 \begin_layout Description
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41007 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41014 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41021 \begin_layout Description
41023 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41028 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41034 \begin_inset space \space{}
41037 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41038 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41047 To insert a fraction use the command
41052 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41056 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41065 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41074 \begin_layout Description
41076 \begin_inset space ~
41079 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41080 \begin_inset space ~
41084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41086 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41093 \begin_layout Description
41095 \begin_inset space ~
41098 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41099 \begin_inset space ~
41103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41105 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41112 \begin_layout Description
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41117 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41118 \begin_inset space ~
41122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41124 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41131 \begin_layout Description
41132 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41139 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41146 \begin_layout Description
41148 \begin_inset space ~
41151 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41152 \begin_inset space ~
41156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41158 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41165 \begin_layout Description
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41170 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41177 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41184 \begin_layout Description
41186 \begin_inset space ~
41190 \begin_inset space ~
41193 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41196 \begin_inset space ~
41200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41202 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41209 for a usage example.
41212 \begin_layout Description
41214 \begin_inset space ~
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41221 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41228 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41240 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41241 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41244 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41251 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41258 \begin_layout Description
41260 \begin_inset space ~
41263 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41264 \begin_inset space ~
41268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41270 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41277 \begin_layout Description
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41282 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41283 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41291 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41298 \begin_layout Description
41300 \begin_inset space ~
41303 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41310 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41317 \begin_layout Description
41319 \begin_inset space ~
41323 \begin_inset space ~
41326 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41333 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41340 \begin_layout Subsection
41342 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41346 \begin_layout Standard
41348 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41349 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41350 The submenu allows you to insert
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41360 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41363 \begin_layout Description
41365 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41374 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41378 \begin_layout Description
41380 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41385 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41388 \begin_layout Description
41390 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41395 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41398 \begin_layout Description
41400 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41409 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41413 \begin_layout Description
41415 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41420 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41423 \begin_layout Description
41425 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41438 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41441 \begin_layout Description
41443 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41445 \begin_inset space ~
41448 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41450 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41451 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41457 \begin_layout Description
41459 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41461 \begin_inset space ~
41464 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41466 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41467 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41473 \begin_layout Description
41475 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41476 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41477 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41478 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41481 \begin_layout Subsection
41484 List/Contents/References
41487 \begin_layout Standard
41488 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41492 \begin_inset space ~
41513 are described in section
41514 \begin_inset space ~
41518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41520 reference "sec:toc"
41529 is described in section
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41536 reference "sec:Index"
41544 is described in section
41545 \begin_inset space ~
41549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41551 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41557 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41560 is described in section
41561 \begin_inset space ~
41565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41567 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41574 \begin_layout Subsection
41578 \begin_layout Standard
41579 To insert floats, as described in section
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41586 reference "sec:Floats"
41590 and in detail the chapter
41597 \begin_inset space ~
41605 \begin_layout Subsection
41609 \begin_layout Standard
41610 To insert notes, described in section
41611 \begin_inset space ~
41615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41617 reference "sec:Notes"
41624 \begin_layout Subsection
41628 \begin_layout Standard
41629 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41631 Branches are described in section
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41638 reference "sec:Branches"
41645 \begin_layout Subsection
41649 \begin_layout Standard
41650 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41651 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41653 An example is the document class
41654 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41664 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41673 with three custom insets.
41676 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41680 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41686 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41689 \begin_layout Subsection
41691 \begin_inset Index idx
41694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41703 \begin_layout Standard
41704 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41706 For more information see chapter
41708 External Document Parts
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41717 \begin_layout Subsection
41719 \begin_inset Index idx
41722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41731 \begin_layout Standard
41732 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41733 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41748 \begin_layout Subsection
41752 \begin_layout Standard
41757 dialog as described in section
41758 \begin_inset space ~
41762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41771 \begin_layout Subsection
41775 \begin_layout Standard
41780 as described in section
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41787 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41794 \begin_layout Subsection
41798 \begin_layout Standard
41803 as described in section
41804 \begin_inset space ~
41808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41810 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41817 \begin_layout Subsection
41819 \begin_inset Index idx
41822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41829 \begin_inset Index idx
41832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41833 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41841 \begin_layout Standard
41842 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41843 Floats are described in section
41844 \begin_inset space ~
41848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41850 reference "sec:Floats"
41854 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41857 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
41865 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_layout Subsection
41877 \begin_layout Standard
41878 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41879 \begin_inset space ~
41883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41885 reference "sec:Index"
41892 \begin_layout Subsection
41896 \begin_layout Standard
41897 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41898 \begin_inset space ~
41902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41904 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41911 \begin_layout Subsection
41915 \begin_layout Standard
41916 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41917 Tables are described in section
41918 \begin_inset space ~
41922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41924 reference "sec:Tables"
41928 and in detail in the chapter
41935 \begin_inset space ~
41943 \begin_layout Subsection
41947 \begin_layout Standard
41953 Graphics are described in section
41954 \begin_inset space ~
41958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41960 reference "sec:Graphics"
41967 \begin_layout Subsection
41971 \begin_layout Standard
41972 Inserts a URL as described in section
41973 \begin_inset space ~
41977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41979 reference "subsec:URLs"
41986 \begin_layout Subsection
41990 \begin_layout Standard
41991 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41992 \begin_inset space ~
41996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41998 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42005 \begin_layout Subsection
42009 \begin_layout Standard
42010 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42011 \begin_inset space ~
42015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42017 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42024 \begin_layout Subsection
42028 \begin_layout Standard
42029 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42030 \begin_inset space ~
42034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42036 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42043 \begin_layout Subsection
42046 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42049 \begin_layout Standard
42050 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42051 environments of the same type.
42053 \begin_inset space ~
42057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42059 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42063 for an explanation.
42066 \begin_layout Subsection
42070 \begin_layout Standard
42071 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42072 title or caption of a float.
42073 Inserts a short title as described in section
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42080 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42087 \begin_layout Subsection
42092 \begin_layout Standard
42093 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42094 Code box as described in section
42095 \begin_inset space ~
42099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42101 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42108 \begin_layout Subsection
42110 \begin_inset Index idx
42113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42122 \begin_layout Standard
42123 Inserts a program listings box.
42124 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42126 Program Code Listings
42131 \begin_inset space ~
42139 \begin_layout Subsection
42141 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42145 \begin_layout Standard
42147 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42148 Inserts the actual date.
42149 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42156 \begin_layout Subsection
42160 \begin_layout Standard
42161 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42162 \begin_inset space ~
42166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42168 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42175 \begin_layout Section
42177 \begin_inset Index idx
42180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42189 \begin_layout Standard
42190 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42191 \begin_inset space ~
42194 of the current document.
42195 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42198 \begin_layout Subsection
42202 \begin_layout Standard
42203 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42204 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42205 to jump, for example, between section
42206 \begin_inset space ~
42210 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42211 \begin_inset space ~
42214 2.5 and use the submenu
42217 \begin_inset space ~
42221 \begin_inset space ~
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42234 \begin_inset space ~
42238 \begin_inset space ~
42244 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42248 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42254 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42257 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42260 \begin_layout Standard
42261 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42265 \begin_inset space ~
42270 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42273 \begin_inset space ~
42278 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42281 \begin_layout Subsection
42282 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42285 \begin_layout Standard
42286 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42290 \begin_layout Subsection
42294 \begin_layout Standard
42295 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42296 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42297 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42313 \begin_layout Subsection
42317 \begin_layout Standard
42318 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42321 The \SpecialChar LyX
42322 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42324 \begin_inset space ~
42332 \begin_inset space ~
42337 manual for a detailed description.
42340 \begin_layout Section
42342 \begin_inset Index idx
42345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42354 \begin_layout Subsection
42358 \begin_layout Standard
42359 Change Tracking is described in section
42360 \begin_inset space ~
42364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42366 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42373 \begin_layout Subsection
42381 \begin_layout Standard
42382 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42383 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42384 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42386 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42387 to the clipboard or update the view.
42388 \begin_inset Newline newline
42391 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42395 \begin_layout Standard
42398 Open Containing Directory
42400 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42401 's temporary folder for the document.
42402 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42403 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42404 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42405 For example some journals require to send the
42409 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42413 \begin_layout Subsection
42414 Start Appendix Here
42417 \begin_layout Standard
42418 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42419 as described in section
42420 \begin_inset space ~
42424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42426 reference "sec:Appendices"
42433 \begin_layout Subsection
42435 \begin_inset space ~
42441 \begin_layout Standard
42442 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42443 default output format for the document (menu
42445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42446 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42447 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42453 \begin_inset space ~
42459 \begin_inset space ~
42463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42465 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42469 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42472 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42473 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42475 \begin_inset space ~
42478 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42483 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42485 \begin_inset space ~
42489 \begin_inset space ~
42495 \begin_inset space ~
42499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42501 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42505 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42506 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42508 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42509 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42511 \begin_inset space ~
42514 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42519 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42523 \begin_inset space ~
42527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42529 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42534 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42535 when it is first configured.
42536 The default output format is
42539 \begin_inset space ~
42547 \begin_layout Subsection
42548 View (Other Formats)
42551 \begin_layout Standard
42552 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42553 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42554 actual document with an external program.
42555 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42556 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42557 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42559 All possible formats are listed in section
42560 \begin_inset space ~
42564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42566 reference "subsec:Export"
42571 You should at least see the menu entry
42576 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42578 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42580 \begin_inset space ~
42584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42586 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42591 \begin_inset Index idx
42594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42595 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42604 \begin_layout Standard
42605 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42606 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42608 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42609 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42611 \begin_inset space ~
42614 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42619 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42623 \begin_inset space ~
42627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42629 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42634 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42635 when it is first configured.
42638 \begin_layout Subsection
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42646 \begin_layout Standard
42647 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42648 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42651 \begin_layout Subsection
42652 Update (Other Formats)
42655 \begin_layout Standard
42656 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42657 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42660 \begin_layout Subsection
42661 View Master Document
42664 \begin_layout Standard
42665 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42681 \begin_inset space ~
42686 manual for more information on this topic).
42687 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42688 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42692 \begin_inset space ~
42696 \begin_inset space ~
42701 generates the output of the whole book, while
42705 will just output the chapter alone.
42708 \begin_layout Standard
42709 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42710 in the document settings (menu
42712 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42713 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42714 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42716 \begin_inset space ~
42720 \begin_inset space ~
42726 \begin_inset space ~
42730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42732 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42736 ) or in the preferences (menu
42738 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42739 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42741 \begin_inset space ~
42744 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42746 \begin_inset space ~
42749 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42751 \begin_inset space ~
42755 \begin_inset space ~
42761 \begin_inset space ~
42765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42767 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42774 \begin_layout Subsection
42775 Update Master Document
42778 \begin_layout Standard
42779 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42795 \begin_inset space ~
42800 manual for more information on this topic).
42801 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42802 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42805 \begin_layout Standard
42806 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42807 in the document settings (menu
42809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42810 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42811 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42813 \begin_inset space ~
42817 \begin_inset space ~
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42829 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42833 ) or in the preferences (menu
42835 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42836 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42838 \begin_inset space ~
42841 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42843 \begin_inset space ~
42846 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42852 \begin_inset space ~
42858 \begin_inset space ~
42862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42864 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42871 \begin_layout Subsection
42873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42875 name "subsec:Compressed"
42882 \begin_layout Standard
42883 Un/compresses the current document.
42884 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42885 compression (see the
42887 Additional Features
42889 manual for details).
42892 \begin_layout Subsection
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42897 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42900 \begin_layout Subsection
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42905 The document settings are described in appendix
42906 \begin_inset space ~
42910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42912 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42919 \begin_layout Section
42921 \begin_inset Index idx
42924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42933 \begin_layout Subsection
42937 \begin_layout Standard
42938 Spell checking is explained in section
42939 \begin_inset space ~
42943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42945 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42952 \begin_layout Subsection
42956 \begin_layout Standard
42957 The thesaurus is described in section
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42964 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42971 \begin_layout Subsection
42973 \begin_inset Index idx
42976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42983 \begin_inset Index idx
42986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42995 \begin_layout Standard
42996 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42997 the highlighted document part.
43000 \begin_layout Subsection
43006 \begin_inset Index idx
43009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43010 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43019 \begin_layout Standard
43020 Generates with the help of the program
43022 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43025 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43026 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43027 This feature is not available on Windows.
43030 \begin_layout Subsection
43036 \begin_inset Index idx
43039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43049 \begin_layout Standard
43050 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43055 \begin_inset space ~
43060 to see the full filename paths.
43063 \begin_layout Subsection
43065 \begin_inset Index idx
43068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43077 \begin_layout Standard
43078 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43079 files as described in section
43080 \begin_inset space ~
43084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43086 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43093 \begin_layout Subsection
43095 \begin_inset Index idx
43098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43111 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43129 \begin_inset Index idx
43132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43133 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43142 \begin_layout Standard
43143 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43144 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43145 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43146 -packages and programs it needs; see
43148 \begin_inset space ~
43152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43154 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43161 \begin_layout Subsection
43165 \begin_layout Standard
43170 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43171 \begin_inset space ~
43175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43177 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43184 \begin_layout Section
43186 \begin_inset Index idx
43189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43198 \begin_layout Standard
43199 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43200 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43202 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43206 \begin_layout Standard
43210 \begin_inset space ~
43215 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43216 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43217 packages and classes found
43218 by \SpecialChar LyX
43220 \begin_inset space ~
43224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43226 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43233 \begin_layout Standard
43237 \begin_inset space ~
43242 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43247 \begin_layout Section
43249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43251 name "sec:Toolbars"
43258 \begin_layout Standard
43259 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43260 \begin_inset space ~
43264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43266 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43273 \begin_layout Standard
43274 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43275 This is described in the
43277 Additional Features
43282 \begin_layout Subsection
43284 \begin_inset Index idx
43287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43296 \begin_layout Standard
43297 \begin_inset Graphics
43298 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43306 \begin_layout Standard
43307 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43313 \begin_layout Standard
43314 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43331 \begin_inset Note Note
43334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43335 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43340 manual for more information.
43348 \begin_layout Standard
43349 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43355 \begin_layout Standard
43356 \begin_inset Tabular
43357 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43358 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43359 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43360 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43366 \begin_inset Graphics
43367 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43381 pull-down box for the environments
43394 \begin_layout Standard
43395 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43401 \begin_layout Standard
43403 \begin_inset Tabular
43404 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43405 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43406 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43407 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43408 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43431 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43438 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43461 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43491 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43507 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43521 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43537 arg "spelling-continuously"
43545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43549 Spellcheck continuously
43555 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43578 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43585 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43608 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43615 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43638 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43645 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43668 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43698 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43700 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43723 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43737 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43756 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43763 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43777 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43796 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43805 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43819 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43820 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43848 Emphasize text, function of the
43849 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43852 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43857 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43859 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43865 arg "dialog-show character"
43876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43897 Set text to noun style, function of the
43898 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43901 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43906 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43908 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43914 arg "dialog-show character"
43925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43931 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43934 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43947 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43950 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43963 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43968 arg "textstyle-apply"
43978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43983 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43984 Format text using the current settings in the
43986 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43988 \begin_inset space ~
43991 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44026 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44028 \begin_inset space ~
44037 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44046 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44067 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 arg "tabular-insert"
44082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44104 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44117 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44136 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44148 Toggle outline window on/off,
44150 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44166 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44178 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44193 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44205 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44218 \begin_layout Subsection
44220 \begin_inset Index idx
44223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44232 \begin_layout Standard
44233 \begin_inset Graphics
44234 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44242 \begin_layout Standard
44243 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44249 \begin_layout Standard
44250 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44254 \begin_layout Standard
44255 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44261 \begin_layout Standard
44262 \begin_inset Tabular
44263 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44264 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44265 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44266 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44294 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44303 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44330 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44348 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44357 arg "layout-toggle List"
44365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44384 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44402 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44411 arg "depth-increment"
44419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44425 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44427 \begin_inset space ~
44431 \begin_inset space ~
44440 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44449 arg "depth-decrement"
44457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44463 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44465 \begin_inset space ~
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44487 arg "float-insert figure"
44495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44502 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44518 arg "float-insert table"
44526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44533 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44540 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44563 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44570 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44579 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44609 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44630 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44653 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44655 \begin_inset space ~
44664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44673 arg "nomencl-insert"
44681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44707 arg "footnote-insert"
44715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44721 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44737 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44753 \begin_inset space ~
44762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44786 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44788 \begin_inset space ~
44797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44806 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44882 \begin_inset space ~
44891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44900 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44915 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44931 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44946 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44948 \begin_inset space ~
44957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44966 arg "dialog-show character"
44974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44980 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44982 \begin_inset space ~
44985 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44998 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45003 arg "textstyle-apply"
45011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45017 Format text using the recent settings in the
45020 arg "dialog-show character"
45029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45038 arg "layout-paragraph"
45046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45052 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45054 \begin_inset space ~
45063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45072 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45086 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45100 \begin_layout Subsection
45101 View/Update Toolbar
45102 \begin_inset Index idx
45105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45106 Toolbar ! View / Update
45114 \begin_layout Standard
45115 \begin_inset Graphics
45116 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45123 \begin_layout Standard
45124 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45130 \begin_layout Standard
45131 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45135 \begin_layout Standard
45136 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45142 \begin_layout Standard
45143 \begin_inset Tabular
45144 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45145 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45146 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45147 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45148 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45187 arg "buffer-update"
45195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45201 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45217 arg "master-buffer-view"
45225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45231 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45233 \begin_inset space ~
45242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45251 arg "master-buffer-update"
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45267 \begin_inset space ~
45271 \begin_inset space ~
45280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45289 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45303 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45304 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45305 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45306 Synchronize with Output
45312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45323 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45340 View (Other Formats)
45346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45353 arg "update-others"
45357 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45372 Update (Other Formats)
45385 \begin_layout Standard
45387 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45388 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45394 \begin_layout Subsection
45398 \begin_layout Standard
45399 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45400 \begin_inset space ~
45404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45406 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45410 , the table toolbar
45411 \begin_inset Index idx
45414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45423 \begin_inset space ~
45428 manual and the math macro toolbar
45429 \begin_inset Index idx
45432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45445 \begin_layout Chapter
45446 The Document Settings
45447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45449 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45454 \begin_inset Index idx
45457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45458 Document ! Settings
45466 \begin_layout Standard
45470 \begin_inset space ~
45475 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45476 is called with the menu
45478 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45482 You can save your document settings as default with the
45484 Save as Document Defaults
45486 button in any dialog.
45487 This will create a template named
45491 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45492 when you create a new document without
45496 \begin_layout Standard
45501 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45502 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45505 \begin_layout Standard
45506 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45507 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45508 to find the one you are looking for.
45509 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45510 the submenus of the dialog.
45512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45516 \begin_inset space \space{}
45520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45527 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45528 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45529 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45532 \begin_layout Section
45536 \begin_layout Standard
45537 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45539 Document classes are described in section
45540 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45546 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45554 \begin_layout Standard
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45563 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45568 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45569 as a layout for a document class.
45570 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45572 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45581 \begin_layout Standard
45582 Some classes use special class options by default.
45583 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45587 and you can decide to use them or not.
45588 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45589 recommended you leave them untouched.
45594 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45595 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45600 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45602 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45608 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45609 \begin_inset Newline newline
45614 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45617 \begin_inset Newline newline
45620 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45621 distribution, see section
45626 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45628 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45641 \begin_layout Standard
45646 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45647 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45648 in the background if the child document
45649 is opened without its master.
45650 This way child documents are always compilable.
45651 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45658 \begin_inset space ~
45666 \begin_layout Standard
45667 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45678 \begin_inset Index idx
45681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 packages ! prettyref
45689 \begin_inset Index idx
45692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45694 packages ! refstyle
45699 for cross-references, see section
45700 \begin_inset space ~
45704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45706 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45713 \begin_layout Section
45717 \begin_layout Standard
45718 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45719 Please refer to the section
45722 \begin_inset space ~
45730 \begin_inset space ~
45735 manual for details.
45738 \begin_layout Section
45742 \begin_layout Standard
45743 Modules are explained in section
45744 \begin_inset space ~
45748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45750 reference "subsec:Modules"
45757 \begin_layout Section
45761 \begin_layout Standard
45763 \begin_inset space ~
45767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45769 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45776 \begin_layout Section
45780 \begin_layout Standard
45781 The document font settings are described in section
45782 \begin_inset space ~
45786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45788 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45795 \begin_layout Section
45799 \begin_layout Standard
45800 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45812 \begin_inset space ~
45817 and whether it should be a
45820 \begin_inset space ~
45825 can also be specified here.
45828 \begin_layout Standard
45829 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45830 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45831 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45833 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45836 \begin_layout Standard
45839 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45842 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45843 justifies the text on screen.
45844 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45846 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45850 \begin_layout Standard
45852 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45861 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45866 \begin_layout Section
45870 \begin_layout Standard
45871 This dialog is described in sections
45872 \begin_inset space ~
45876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45878 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45885 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45892 \begin_layout Section
45896 \begin_layout Standard
45897 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45898 \begin_inset space ~
45902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45904 reference "subsec:Margins"
45911 \begin_layout Section
45913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45915 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45920 \begin_inset Index idx
45923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45924 Language ! Encoding
45932 \begin_layout Standard
45933 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45934 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45935 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45937 is always encoded in utf8).
45938 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45939 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45940 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45941 -command is not known for
45942 a particular character).
45943 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45947 \begin_layout Standard
45949 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45950 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45951 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45952 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45953 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45954 's default encoding).
45955 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45956 's Unicode support covers the
45957 characters of most scripts.
45958 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45959 using one of the traditional, or
45960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45967 , encodings is necessary.
45970 \begin_layout Standard
45972 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45974 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45977 Traditional (auto-selected)
45983 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45984 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45985 the given language(s).
45987 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45991 \begin_layout Standard
45993 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45994 If you use the option
45999 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46002 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46003 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46006 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46009 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46010 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46011 exactly one encoding.
46012 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46017 \begin_layout Standard
46019 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46020 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46026 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46027 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46031 \begin_layout Standard
46033 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46034 Finally, you can also select
46038 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46039 Note that this encoding is then used for
46044 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46045 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46049 \begin_layout Standard
46051 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46054 Do not load inputenc
46056 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46057 from automatically loading the
46064 \begin_inset Index idx
46067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46069 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46071 packages ! inputenc
46079 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46080 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46081 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46082 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46083 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46085 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46091 Traditional (auto-selected)
46098 \begin_layout Standard
46100 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46102 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46103 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46104 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46105 installation supports Unicode), choose
46106 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46107 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46108 is quite incomplete, so
46109 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46114 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46115 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46116 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46117 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46118 -commands is not used, because all
46119 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46120 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46121 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46122 , two new alternative engines
46123 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46125 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46127 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46130 \begin_inset space ~
46138 \begin_inset space ~
46146 \begin_inset space ~
46152 \begin_inset space ~
46156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46158 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46163 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46167 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46172 \begin_layout Standard
46176 \begin_inset space ~
46181 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46182 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46192 The possible settings are:
46195 \begin_layout Description
46196 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46199 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46203 \begin_inset space ~
46207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46209 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46216 \begin_layout Description
46217 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46218 format you will use.
46219 In many cases this will be
46224 \begin_inset Index idx
46227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46235 If the newer package
46240 \begin_inset Index idx
46243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46245 packages ! polyglossia
46250 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46251 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46252 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46254 this package will be used instead of
46261 \begin_layout Description
46263 \begin_inset space ~
46274 would be more appropriate.
46277 \begin_layout Description
46278 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46279 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46283 (for German texts), type in
46286 \begin_inset Newline newline
46291 usepackage{ngerman}
46294 \begin_layout Description
46295 None will not use a language package.
46296 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46299 \begin_layout Standard
46300 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46303 \begin_layout Description
46305 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46307 \begin_inset space ~
46311 \begin_inset space ~
46315 \begin_inset space ~
46322 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46328 \begin_inset Index idx
46331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46333 packages ! inputenc
46339 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46340 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46341 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46347 \begin_layout Description
46348 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46350 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46351 commands, which may result in a big
46352 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46353 -commands are needed.
46355 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46356 This is the same as the
46369 \begin_layout Description
46371 \begin_inset space ~
46375 \begin_inset space ~
46378 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46381 \begin_layout Description
46383 \begin_inset space ~
46387 \begin_inset space ~
46390 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46393 \begin_layout Description
46395 \begin_inset space ~
46398 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46401 \begin_layout Description
46403 \begin_inset space ~
46407 \begin_inset space ~
46410 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46411 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46414 \begin_layout Description
46416 \begin_inset space ~
46420 \begin_inset space ~
46423 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46427 \begin_layout Description
46429 \begin_inset space ~
46433 \begin_inset space ~
46436 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46437 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46440 \begin_layout Description
46442 \begin_inset space ~
46446 \begin_inset space ~
46450 \begin_inset space ~
46453 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46454 \begin_inset space ~
46460 \begin_layout Description
46462 \begin_inset space ~
46466 \begin_inset space ~
46470 \begin_inset space ~
46473 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46474 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46477 \begin_layout Description
46479 \begin_inset space ~
46483 \begin_inset space ~
46486 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46487 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46488 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46489 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46490 \begin_inset space ~
46494 \begin_inset space ~
46500 \begin_layout Description
46502 \begin_inset space ~
46506 \begin_inset space ~
46509 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46510 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46511 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46513 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46514 \begin_inset space ~
46518 \begin_inset space ~
46524 \begin_layout Description
46526 \begin_inset space ~
46530 \begin_inset space ~
46533 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46536 \begin_layout Description
46538 \begin_inset space ~
46542 \begin_inset space ~
46545 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46548 \begin_layout Description
46550 \begin_inset space ~
46554 \begin_inset space ~
46557 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46560 \begin_layout Description
46562 \begin_inset space ~
46565 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46568 \begin_layout Description
46570 \begin_inset space ~
46573 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46576 \begin_layout Description
46578 \begin_inset space ~
46582 \begin_inset space ~
46585 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46588 \begin_layout Description
46590 \begin_inset space ~
46594 \begin_inset space ~
46600 \begin_layout Description
46602 \begin_inset space ~
46606 \begin_inset space ~
46609 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46612 \begin_layout Description
46614 \begin_inset space ~
46618 \begin_inset space ~
46624 \begin_layout Description
46626 \begin_inset space ~
46630 \begin_inset space ~
46633 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46639 \begin_inset Index idx
46642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46649 , when using this, set the document language to
46654 \begin_layout Description
46656 \begin_inset space ~
46660 \begin_inset space ~
46663 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46668 , when using this, set the document language to
46671 \begin_inset space ~
46677 \begin_layout Description
46679 \begin_inset space ~
46683 \begin_inset space ~
46686 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46692 \begin_inset Index idx
46695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46697 packages ! japanese
46702 , when using this, set the document language to
46707 \begin_layout Description
46709 \begin_inset space ~
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46716 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46721 , when using this, set the document language to
46726 \begin_layout Description
46728 \begin_inset space ~
46732 \begin_inset space ~
46735 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46740 , when using this, set the document language to
46745 \begin_layout Description
46747 \begin_inset space ~
46750 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46753 \begin_layout Description
46755 \begin_inset space ~
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46763 \begin_inset space ~
46766 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46769 \begin_layout Description
46771 \begin_inset space ~
46775 \begin_inset space ~
46779 \begin_inset space ~
46782 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46783 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46784 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46787 \begin_layout Description
46789 \begin_inset space ~
46793 \begin_inset space ~
46799 \begin_layout Description
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46808 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46809 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46812 \begin_layout Description
46814 \begin_inset space ~
46818 \begin_inset space ~
46821 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46827 \begin_inset Index idx
46830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46837 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46838 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46840 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46841 with the default encoding (
46843 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46849 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46850 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46855 \begin_layout Description
46857 \begin_inset space ~
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46868 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46875 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46878 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46885 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46886 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46888 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46891 \begin_layout Description
46893 \begin_inset space ~
46897 \begin_inset space ~
46900 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46906 \begin_inset Index idx
46909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46917 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46920 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46922 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46923 This used to be more comprehensive than
46926 \begin_inset space ~
46931 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46936 \begin_layout Description
46938 \begin_inset space ~
46941 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46947 \begin_inset Index idx
46950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46952 packages ! inputenc
46959 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46960 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46962 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46963 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46964 with the default encoding (
46966 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46972 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46973 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46978 \begin_layout Description
46980 \begin_inset space ~
46984 \begin_inset space ~
46988 \begin_inset space ~
46991 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46992 \begin_inset space ~
46998 \begin_layout Description
47000 \begin_inset space ~
47004 \begin_inset space ~
47008 \begin_inset space ~
47011 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47012 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47013 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47017 \begin_layout Description
47019 \begin_inset space ~
47023 \begin_inset space ~
47027 \begin_inset space ~
47030 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47031 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47034 \begin_layout Section
47036 \begin_inset Index idx
47039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47046 \begin_inset Index idx
47049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47056 \begin_inset Index idx
47059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47060 Color ! Shaded boxes
47066 \begin_inset Index idx
47069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47070 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47078 \begin_layout Standard
47079 Here you can alter the font color for the
47083 (default: black), for
47086 \begin_inset space ~
47091 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47095 (default: white) and for
47098 \begin_inset space ~
47108 sets the color back to the default.
47111 \begin_layout Standard
47112 Clicking any button showing
47120 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47121 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47122 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47123 later more quickly.
47126 \begin_layout Standard
47127 Note, if you change the
47130 \begin_inset space ~
47135 font color and use the option
47138 \begin_inset space ~
47143 in the document settings under
47146 \begin_inset space ~
47151 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47152 \begin_inset space ~
47156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47158 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47165 \begin_layout Standard
47166 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47172 \begin_layout Standard
47176 \begin_inset space ~
47185 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47188 \begin_inset space ~
47191 Code after a forced page break:
47194 \begin_layout Itemize
47195 For the page color:
47196 \begin_inset Newline newline
47203 pagecolor{color name}
47206 \begin_layout Itemize
47207 For the text color:
47208 \begin_inset Newline newline
47218 \begin_layout Standard
47219 You are restricted to one of
47255 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47262 \begin_inset space ~
47268 \begin_inset Newline newline
47271 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47272 names to refer to them:
47275 \begin_layout Itemize
47281 \begin_inset Newline newline
47286 page_backgroundcolor
47289 \begin_layout Itemize
47293 \begin_inset space ~
47299 \begin_inset Newline newline
47307 \begin_layout Itemize
47311 \begin_inset space ~
47317 \begin_inset Newline newline
47325 \begin_layout Itemize
47329 \begin_inset space ~
47335 \begin_inset Newline newline
47343 \begin_layout Standard
47344 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47347 \begin_inset space ~
47355 \begin_inset space ~
47363 \begin_layout Section
47365 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47369 \begin_layout Standard
47371 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47372 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47373 \begin_inset space ~
47377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47379 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47387 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47388 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47391 \begin_layout Standard
47393 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47394 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47396 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47399 \begin_layout Section
47403 \begin_layout Standard
47404 Here you can adjust the
47408 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47412 as described in section
47413 \begin_inset space ~
47417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47419 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47424 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47428 \begin_layout Standard
47430 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47431 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47433 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47434 of this package can be used as well.
47435 The most common one are:
47438 \begin_layout Description
47440 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47441 right Line numbers to the right margin
47444 \begin_layout Description
47446 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47447 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47451 \begin_layout Description
47453 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47454 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47457 \begin_layout Description
47459 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47460 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47463 \begin_layout Description
47465 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47467 \begin_inset space ~
47470 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47475 \begin_layout Section
47479 \begin_layout Standard
47480 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47486 \begin_inset Index idx
47489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47491 packages ! biblatex
47501 \begin_inset Index idx
47504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47516 \begin_inset Index idx
47519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47527 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47530 Sectioned bibliography
47532 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47538 \begin_inset Index idx
47541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47543 packages ! bibtopic
47553 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47554 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47558 for the generation of the bibliography.
47559 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47560 \begin_inset space ~
47564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47566 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47573 \begin_layout Section
47577 \begin_layout Standard
47578 Here you can define the
47582 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47584 \begin_inset space ~
47588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47590 reference "sec:Index"
47597 \begin_layout Section
47601 \begin_layout Standard
47602 The PDF properties are explained in section
47603 \begin_inset space ~
47607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47609 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47616 \begin_layout Section
47620 \begin_layout Standard
47621 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47622 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47628 \begin_inset Index idx
47631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47643 \begin_inset Index idx
47646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47658 \begin_inset Index idx
47661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47673 \begin_inset Index idx
47676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47688 \begin_inset Index idx
47691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47693 packages ! mathdots
47703 \begin_inset Index idx
47706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47708 packages ! mathtools
47718 \begin_inset Index idx
47721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47733 \begin_inset Index idx
47736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47738 packages ! stackrel
47748 \begin_inset Index idx
47751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47753 packages ! stmaryrd
47763 \begin_inset Index idx
47766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47768 packages ! undertilde
47773 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47776 \begin_layout Description
47777 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47778 -errors in formulas,
47779 ensure that you have this enabled.
47782 \begin_layout Description
47783 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47784 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47785 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47789 \begin_layout Description
47790 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47793 \begin_inset space ~
47805 \begin_layout Description
47806 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47809 \begin_inset space ~
47821 \begin_layout Description
47822 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47833 \begin_layout Description
47834 mathtools is used for the math commands
47870 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47877 \begin_layout Description
47878 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47880 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47889 \begin_layout Description
47890 stackrel is used for the math command
47907 \begin_layout Description
47908 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47911 \begin_layout Description
47912 undertilde is used for the math command
47920 Accents for one Character
47929 \begin_layout Section
47931 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47933 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47939 \begin_layout Standard
47941 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47942 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47945 \begin_layout Standard
47947 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47948 The float placement options
47949 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47952 are described in the section
47955 \begin_inset space ~
47959 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47961 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47969 \begin_inset space ~
47977 \begin_layout Section
47981 \begin_layout Standard
47982 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47984 Program Code Listings
47989 \begin_inset space ~
47997 \begin_layout Section
48001 \begin_layout Standard
48002 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48010 set to be used and set the
48015 The itemize environment is described in section
48016 \begin_inset space ~
48020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48022 reference "sec:Itemize"
48029 \begin_layout Standard
48030 You can furthermore specify a
48033 \begin_inset space ~
48038 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48039 command of the desired character.
48040 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48047 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48053 \begin_inset space \space{}
48057 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48067 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48068 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48071 \begin_layout Standard
48072 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48080 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48081 -packages in the preamble (menu
48084 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48085 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48088 \begin_inset space ~
48094 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48098 usepackage{textcomp}
48101 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48105 usepackage{amssymb}
48115 \begin_layout Section
48119 \begin_layout Standard
48120 Branches are described in section
48121 \begin_inset space ~
48125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48127 reference "sec:Branches"
48134 \begin_layout Section
48136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48138 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48145 \begin_layout Standard
48146 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48149 \begin_layout Description
48151 \begin_inset space ~
48155 \begin_inset space ~
48158 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48178 View Master Document
48179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48186 Update Master Document
48187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48194 menu or the toolbar.
48195 The default is set in
48197 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48198 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48200 \begin_inset space ~
48203 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48207 \begin_inset space ~
48211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48213 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48220 \begin_layout Description
48222 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48224 \begin_inset space ~
48228 \begin_inset space ~
48232 \begin_inset space ~
48235 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48240 option which is needed with some packages.
48241 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48242 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48245 \begin_layout Description
48247 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48249 \begin_inset space ~
48253 \begin_inset space ~
48256 Options offers settings for the
48264 \begin_layout Itemize
48268 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48270 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48272 \begin_inset space ~
48278 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48280 \begin_inset space ~
48284 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48290 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48292 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48293 settings for the menu
48295 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48299 \begin_inset space ~
48303 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48306 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48307 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48312 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48314 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48316 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48319 or a detailed description see section
48321 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48326 \begin_inset space ~
48332 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48336 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48340 \begin_layout Itemize
48342 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48345 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48347 determines whether so-called
48348 \begin_inset Quotes els
48352 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48356 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48358 \begin_inset Quotes els
48362 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48365 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48366 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48367 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48369 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48371 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48372 macros, you can uncheck this.
48373 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48380 \begin_layout Description
48382 \begin_inset space ~
48386 \begin_inset space ~
48389 Options offers settings for the export format
48397 \begin_inset space ~
48402 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48403 \begin_inset space ~
48406 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48410 \begin_inset space ~
48415 settings are described in detail in section
48417 Math Output in XHTML
48422 \begin_inset space ~
48431 \begin_inset space ~
48435 \begin_inset space ~
48440 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48443 \begin_layout Description
48445 \begin_inset space ~
48450 Save transient properties
48452 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48453 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48454 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48458 \begin_layout Itemize
48459 the activation of change tracking
48462 \begin_layout Itemize
48463 the output of tracked changes
48466 \begin_layout Itemize
48467 the recording of the document directory path.
48470 \begin_layout Standard
48471 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48472 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48476 \begin_layout Section
48484 \begin_layout Standard
48485 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48487 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48489 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48491 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48495 \begin_layout Standard
48496 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48497 -syntax is given in section
48498 \begin_inset space ~
48502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48504 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48511 \begin_layout Chapter
48517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48519 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48524 \begin_inset Index idx
48527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48536 \begin_layout Standard
48537 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48539 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48543 It has the following submenus.
48546 \begin_layout Section
48550 \begin_layout Subsection
48554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48555 User Interface File
48556 \begin_inset Index idx
48559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48560 Customization ! of toolbars
48566 \begin_inset Index idx
48569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48570 Customization ! of menus
48578 \begin_layout Standard
48579 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48580 interface (ui) file.
48581 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48589 \begin_layout Description
48594 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48597 \begin_layout Description
48604 the menu entries in popup context menus
48607 \begin_layout Description
48612 specifies the toolbar buttons
48615 \begin_layout Standard
48616 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48617 and edit the entries.
48620 \begin_layout Standard
48621 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48633 entries must be finished with an explicit
48658 and in the case of the
48659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48671 The syntax for the entries is:
48674 \begin_layout Standard
48675 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48704 \begin_layout Standard
48706 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48709 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48710 -functions are listed in the menu
48712 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48714 \begin_inset space ~
48722 \begin_layout Standard
48723 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48729 \begin_layout Standard
48730 For example, assuming you use the menu
48732 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48735 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48739 \begin_layout Standard
48740 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48764 \begin_layout Standard
48766 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48781 to have the sixth bookmark.
48784 \begin_layout Standard
48788 \begin_inset space ~
48793 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48794 's toolbar buttons.
48795 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48799 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48807 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48811 \begin_layout Standard
48814 Enable tool tips in main work area
48816 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48820 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48824 \begin_layout Standard
48829 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48830 should display in the menu
48832 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48834 \begin_inset space ~
48842 \begin_layout Subsection
48846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48850 \begin_layout Standard
48853 Restore window layouts and geometries
48856 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48857 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48861 \begin_layout Standard
48864 Restore cursor positions
48866 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48870 \begin_layout Standard
48873 Load opened files from last session
48875 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48879 \begin_layout Standard
48882 Clear all session information
48884 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48885 sessions (cursor positions, names
48886 of last opened documents, etc.).
48889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48893 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48898 \begin_inset Index idx
48901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48910 \begin_layout Standard
48913 Backup original documents when saving
48915 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48916 it was saved the last time.
48917 It is stored in the
48920 \begin_inset space ~
48926 \begin_inset space ~
48930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48932 reference "sec:Paths"
48936 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48939 \begin_inset space ~
48945 The backup file has the file extension
48946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48960 \begin_layout Standard
48963 Backup documents, every
48965 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48968 \begin_layout Standard
48971 Save documents compressed by default
48973 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48974 \begin_inset space ~
48978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48980 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48985 This applies to newly created documents only.
48986 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48990 Windows & work area
48993 \begin_layout Standard
48996 Open documents in tabs
48998 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49002 \begin_layout Standard
49007 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49014 \begin_inset space ~
49018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49020 reference "sec:Paths"
49024 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49031 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49032 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49033 of \SpecialChar LyX
49035 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49036 instance is created for each file.
49039 \begin_layout Standard
49042 Single close-tab button
49044 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49054 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49055 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49056 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49060 \begin_layout Standard
49061 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49069 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49070 before the change takes effect.
49078 \begin_layout Standard
49083 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49085 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49087 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49091 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49092 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49093 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49096 \begin_layout Subsection
49098 \begin_inset Index idx
49101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49110 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49117 \begin_layout Standard
49118 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49122 \begin_layout Standard
49123 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49131 This section only deals with the fonts
49135 the \SpecialChar LyX
49137 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49140 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49141 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49152 \begin_layout Standard
49153 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49170 (depends on the system) as its
49173 \begin_inset space ~
49189 \begin_layout Standard
49190 You can change the font size with the
49197 \begin_layout Standard
49202 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49207 points have the size of 1
49208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49212 \begin_inset space ~
49216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49218 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49223 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49228 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49229 \begin_inset space ~
49233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49235 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49242 \begin_layout Subsection
49244 \begin_inset Index idx
49247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49248 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49255 \begin_inset Index idx
49258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49267 \begin_layout Standard
49268 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49269 by choosing an item in the
49270 list and selecting the
49277 \begin_layout Standard
49278 By checking the option
49282 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49285 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49286 \begin_inset space ~
49290 \begin_inset space ~
49295 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49298 \begin_layout Subsection
49300 \begin_inset Index idx
49303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49312 \begin_layout Standard
49313 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49317 \begin_layout Standard
49322 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49323 This feature is described in section
49324 \begin_inset space ~
49328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49330 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49337 \begin_layout Standard
49338 Checking the option
49341 \begin_inset space ~
49345 \begin_inset space ~
49349 \begin_inset space ~
49354 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49357 \begin_layout Section
49359 \begin_inset Index idx
49362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49371 \begin_layout Subsection
49375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49379 \begin_layout Standard
49382 Cursor follows scrollbar
49384 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49388 \begin_layout Standard
49389 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49390 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49391 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49394 \begin_layout Standard
49397 Scroll below end of document
49399 is self-explanatory.
49402 \begin_layout Standard
49403 In \SpecialChar LyX
49404 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49411 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49413 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49414 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49415 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49419 \begin_layout Standard
49421 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49424 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49426 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49427 paste operations (i.
49428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49431 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49432 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49433 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49434 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49435 dissolving from insets.
49440 \begin_layout Standard
49443 Sort environments alphabetically
49445 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49448 \begin_layout Standard
49451 Group environments by their category
49453 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49456 \begin_layout Standard
49461 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49476 \begin_layout Standard
49477 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49482 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49483 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49487 \begin_layout Subsection
49489 \begin_inset Index idx
49492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49499 \begin_inset Index idx
49502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49503 Settings ! Shortcuts
49511 \begin_layout Standard
49516 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49518 Several binding files are available, among them:
49521 \begin_layout Description
49522 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49525 \begin_layout Description
49526 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49538 \begin_layout Description
49539 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49550 \begin_layout Standard
49551 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49556 , and binding files for special languages.
49557 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49562 \begin_inset space \space{}
49566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49574 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49575 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49576 will try to use the appropriate binding
49580 \begin_layout Standard
49581 Some binding files, like
49585 , only have a limited scope.
49586 When looking at the end of the file
49590 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49593 \begin_layout Standard
49597 \begin_inset space ~
49601 \begin_inset space ~
49606 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49607 in the selected key binding file.
49610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49614 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49619 \begin_inset Index idx
49622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49623 Key Bindings ! Editing
49631 \begin_layout Standard
49632 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49633 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49634 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49635 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49638 Show key-bindings containing
49641 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49642 Insert there for example as keyword
49643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49650 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49651 functions that contain
49652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49660 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49661 All \SpecialChar LyX
49662 functions are also listed in the file
49667 that you will find in the
49674 \begin_layout Standard
49675 For example, to add the shortcut
49683 , select the function and press the
49688 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49689 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49692 \begin_layout Standard
49693 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49694 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49696 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49697 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49699 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49704 \begin_layout Standard
49705 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49708 \begin_layout Standard
49709 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49711 The syntax of the entries is:
49714 \begin_layout Standard
49720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49739 \begin_layout Standard
49740 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49741 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49769 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49770 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49771 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49772 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49774 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49778 , you needed to specify it as
49783 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49786 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49789 \begin_layout Subsection
49791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49793 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49798 \begin_inset Index idx
49801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49808 \begin_inset Index idx
49811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49812 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49820 \begin_layout Standard
49821 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49822 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49823 provides keyboard maps.
49824 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49825 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49828 \begin_inset space ~
49832 \begin_inset space ~
49837 and select the keyboard map file named
49844 \begin_layout Standard
49853 keyboard map and, if you use the
49857 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49860 arg "keymap-primary"
49866 arg "keymap-secondary"
49869 respectively or toggle between them with
49872 arg "keymap-toggle"
49878 \begin_layout Standard
49879 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49887 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49896 \begin_layout Standard
49897 You can also specify the mouse
49899 Wheel scrolling speed
49902 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49906 Middle mouse button pasting
49908 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49909 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49912 \begin_layout Standard
49920 \begin_inset space ~
49924 \begin_inset space ~
49929 you can select a key for zooming.
49930 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49933 \begin_layout Subsection
49937 \begin_layout Standard
49938 Input completion is described in section
49939 \begin_inset space ~
49943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49945 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49952 \begin_layout Section
49954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49961 \begin_inset Index idx
49964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49971 \begin_inset Index idx
49974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49983 \begin_layout Standard
49984 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49985 are normally determined during
49987 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49990 \begin_layout Description
49992 \begin_inset space ~
49995 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49996 's working directory.
49997 It is the default when you
50008 \begin_inset space ~
50016 \begin_layout Description
50018 \begin_inset space ~
50021 templates This directory
50022 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50023 contains the templates that are shown
50024 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50025 will be opened when you use the menu
50026 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50031 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50033 \begin_inset space ~
50037 \begin_inset space ~
50045 \begin_layout Description
50047 \begin_inset space ~
50050 files This directory
50051 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50052 will be opened when you use the
50053 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50054 contains the example files that are listed in
50057 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50066 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50068 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50070 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50076 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50078 \begin_inset Newline newline
50082 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50094 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50095 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50105 \begin_layout Description
50107 \begin_inset space ~
50111 \begin_inset Index idx
50114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50120 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50121 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50122 \begin_inset space ~
50126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50128 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50136 will be used to save the backups.
50137 \begin_inset Newline newline
50140 Backup files have the ending
50141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50151 \begin_layout Description
50153 \begin_inset space ~
50156 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50157 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50159 \begin_inset Newline newline
50166 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50172 You can edit this file with the program
50181 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50182 in its preferences under
50185 \begin_inset space ~
50191 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50196 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50198 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50199 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50205 and \SpecialChar LyX
50206 need to be running the same time.
50207 \begin_inset Newline newline
50210 The pipe is also used for the
50214 feature, see section
50215 \begin_inset space ~
50219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50221 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50226 \begin_inset Newline newline
50229 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50230 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50231 \begin_inset Newline newline
50247 \begin_layout Description
50249 \begin_inset space ~
50252 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50255 \begin_layout Description
50257 \begin_inset space ~
50260 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50261 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50262 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50265 \begin_layout Description
50267 \begin_inset space ~
50270 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50276 You only need to specify it if you are using
50280 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50282 For \SpecialChar LyX
50287 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50291 \begin_layout Description
50293 \begin_inset space ~
50296 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50297 When \SpecialChar LyX
50298 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50299 to find it on the system.
50300 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50302 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50311 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50312 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50315 \begin_layout Description
50317 \begin_inset space ~
50320 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50321 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50322 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50323 code or in the document
50325 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50327 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50328 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50329 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50330 scanned for the input files.
50331 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50332 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50334 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50335 compilation may fail for some documents.
50338 \begin_layout Section
50342 \begin_layout Standard
50343 Here you can insert your
50352 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50354 \begin_inset space ~
50358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50360 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50364 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50367 \begin_layout Section
50369 \begin_inset Index idx
50372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50373 Language ! Settings
50379 \begin_inset Index idx
50382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50383 Settings ! Language
50391 \begin_layout Subsection
50393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50395 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50402 \begin_layout Description
50404 \begin_inset space ~
50408 \begin_inset space ~
50411 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50413 You can find its actual translation status here:
50414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50416 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50422 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50428 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50429 LaTeX Language Support
50434 \begin_layout Description
50436 \begin_inset space ~
50439 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50440 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50441 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50442 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50459 The most widespread language package is
50464 \begin_inset Index idx
50467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50474 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50476 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50477 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50478 come with the alternative
50484 \begin_inset Index idx
50487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50489 packages ! polyglossia
50494 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50495 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50501 The available selections are described in section
50502 \begin_inset space ~
50506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50508 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50515 \begin_layout Description
50517 \begin_inset space ~
50521 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50522 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50523 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50525 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50529 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50533 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50535 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50539 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50540 that is used to switch to a different language
50541 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50542 to start the package
50546 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50547 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50551 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50552 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50555 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50567 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50575 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50578 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50580 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50584 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50602 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50603 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50610 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50611 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50616 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50621 , this setting is ignored.
50626 \begin_layout Description
50628 \begin_inset space ~
50632 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50639 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50640 Use this if the language switch set in
50644 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50648 's alternative command
50652 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50653 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50656 end{otherlanguage*}
50660 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50661 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50662 command toggles the package on and off
50663 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50664 Empty by default, as
50668 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50670 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50675 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50681 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50686 , this setting is ignored.
50691 \begin_layout Description
50693 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50695 \begin_inset space ~
50699 \begin_inset space ~
50702 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50706 \begin_layout Description
50708 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50710 \begin_inset space ~
50714 \begin_inset space ~
50717 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50723 \begin_layout Description
50725 \begin_inset space ~
50729 \begin_inset space ~
50733 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50735 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50738 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50739 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50742 to the document class options
50743 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50744 rather than the language package options.
50745 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50749 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50750 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50752 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50753 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50755 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50760 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50761 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50770 \begin_layout Description
50772 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50774 \begin_inset space ~
50778 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50780 \begin_inset space ~
50784 \begin_inset space ~
50788 \begin_inset space ~
50794 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50796 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50799 this option is set,
50800 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50801 the language switch defined in
50804 \begin_inset space ~
50809 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50810 to the document language.
50811 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50812 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50815 \begin_inset space ~
50820 or if a package resets the document language.
50821 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50822 usually should be the document language).
50823 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50824 documents start with the chosen document language.
50825 When this option is not set, the
50828 \begin_inset space ~
50833 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50835 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50838 \begin_inset space ~
50848 \begin_layout Description
50850 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50852 \begin_inset space ~
50856 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50858 \begin_inset space ~
50862 \begin_inset space ~
50866 \begin_inset space ~
50872 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50876 \begin_inset space ~
50880 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50881 Set document language explicitly
50887 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50889 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50895 \begin_inset space ~
50901 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50903 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50907 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50909 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50912 the end of the document.
50913 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50917 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50918 \paragraph_spacing single
50920 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50926 \begin_layout Description
50928 \begin_inset space ~
50932 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50934 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50938 \begin_inset space ~
50942 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50944 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50946 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50950 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50953 in a language different
50954 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50956 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50959 the document language will be
50960 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50961 marked (by default with a blue
50964 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50966 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50970 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50974 \begin_layout Description
50976 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50978 \begin_inset space ~
50982 \begin_inset space ~
50986 \begin_inset space ~
50989 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50990 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50991 switched via the operating system.
50992 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50997 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50998 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51003 \begin_layout Description
51005 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51007 \begin_inset space ~
51011 \begin_inset space ~
51014 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51015 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51020 \begin_layout Description
51022 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51024 \begin_inset space ~
51028 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51030 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51034 \begin_inset space ~
51038 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51039 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51040 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51042 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51046 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51048 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51049 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51051 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51052 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51053 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51055 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51060 \begin_layout Standard
51065 means that the cursor
51066 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51067 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51068 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51073 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51074 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51078 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51080 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51081 specific case always means: move
51085 in text (even if this means:
51091 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51092 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51093 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51094 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51095 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51107 \begin_layout Standard
51109 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51114 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51115 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51116 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51120 ) when coming from the left.
51121 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51123 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51124 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51125 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51132 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51136 \begin_layout Description
51138 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51140 \begin_inset space ~
51144 \begin_inset space ~
51147 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51148 separator alignment).
51149 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51154 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51155 (static) custom character here.
51158 \begin_layout Description
51160 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51162 \begin_inset space ~
51166 \begin_inset space ~
51169 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51175 \begin_layout Subsection
51179 \begin_layout Standard
51180 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51181 \begin_inset space ~
51185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51187 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51194 \begin_layout Section
51198 \begin_layout Subsection
51200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51202 name "subsec:General-output"
51209 \begin_layout Description
51211 \begin_inset space ~
51214 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51216 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51218 \begin_inset space ~
51224 For a detailed description see section
51226 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51231 \begin_inset space ~
51239 \begin_layout Description
51241 \begin_inset space ~
51244 Options Options for the program
51248 that is used for the export format
51253 \begin_inset space ~
51257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51259 reference "subsec:Export"
51264 Possible options are listed in the
51269 \begin_inset Newline newline
51273 \begin_inset Flex URL
51276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51278 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51288 \begin_layout Description
51290 \begin_inset space ~
51294 \begin_inset space ~
51297 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51300 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51301 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51303 \begin_inset space ~
51309 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51312 \begin_layout Description
51314 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51316 \begin_inset space ~
51320 \begin_inset Index idx
51323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51330 \begin_inset Index idx
51333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51334 Settings ! Date format
51339 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51340 \begin_inset Newline newline
51344 \begin_inset Flex URL
51347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51349 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51355 \begin_inset Newline newline
51358 For example the format
51359 \begin_inset Newline newline
51363 \begin_inset Newline newline
51366 prints the date as day/month/year.
51371 \begin_layout Description
51373 \begin_inset space ~
51377 \begin_inset space ~
51380 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51381 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51384 \begin_layout Subsection
51390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51392 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51397 \begin_inset Index idx
51400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51401 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51410 \begin_layout Description
51412 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51414 \begin_inset space ~
51422 \begin_inset space ~
51426 \begin_inset space ~
51429 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51434 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51455 are used for Cyrillic.
51456 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51469 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51471 sets up in the background.
51472 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51477 \begin_layout Description
51479 \begin_inset space ~
51483 \begin_inset space ~
51487 \begin_inset space ~
51491 \begin_inset space ~
51494 options They only have an effect when the program
51498 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51501 \begin_layout Standard
51502 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51503 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51504 manuals of the applications.
51507 \begin_layout Description
51509 \begin_inset space ~
51512 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51513 \begin_inset space ~
51517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51519 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51526 \begin_layout Description
51528 \begin_inset space ~
51531 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51532 \begin_inset space ~
51536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51538 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51545 \begin_layout Description
51547 \begin_inset space ~
51550 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51551 \begin_inset space ~
51555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51557 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51564 \begin_layout Description
51570 \begin_inset space ~
51573 command Command for the program
51575 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51578 that is described in the section
51580 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51585 Additional Features
51590 \begin_layout Standard
51591 There are additionally the following options:
51594 \begin_layout Description
51596 \begin_inset space ~
51600 \begin_inset space ~
51604 \begin_inset space ~
51608 \begin_inset space ~
51613 \begin_inset space ~
51616 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51634 to separate folders.
51635 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51637 \begin_inset Index idx
51640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51647 \begin_inset Index idx
51650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51659 \begin_layout Description
51661 \begin_inset space ~
51665 \begin_inset space ~
51669 \begin_inset space ~
51673 \begin_inset space ~
51677 \begin_inset space ~
51681 \begin_inset space ~
51684 changes Removes all manually set
51690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51691 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51693 \begin_inset space ~
51698 dialog when changing the document class.
51701 \begin_layout Section
51703 \begin_inset space ~
51707 \begin_inset Index idx
51710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51719 \begin_layout Subsection
51721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51723 name "subsec:Converters"
51728 \begin_inset Index idx
51731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51740 \begin_layout Standard
51741 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51742 from one format to another.
51743 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51744 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51751 \begin_inset space ~
51756 field and press the
51761 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51765 \begin_inset space ~
51770 drop-down list, modify the
51774 field and press the
51781 \begin_layout Standard
51784 Converter File Cache
51790 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51792 Maximum Age (in days
51795 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51796 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51799 \begin_layout Standard
51800 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51801 definition, is described in the section
51812 \begin_layout Subsection
51814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51816 name "sec:File-Formats"
51821 \begin_inset Index idx
51824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51831 \begin_inset Index idx
51834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51843 \begin_layout Standard
51844 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51854 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51857 \begin_layout Standard
51858 You can also define the
51860 Default output format
51862 that is used when you use
51864 View, Update, View Master Document
51868 Update Master Document
51874 menu or the toolbar.
51877 \begin_layout Standard
51878 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51889 \begin_layout Standard
51890 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51892 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51893 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51894 This is done by specifying a
51899 More about this is described in the section
51910 \begin_layout Chapter
51911 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51913 \begin_inset Index idx
51916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51925 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51932 \begin_layout Standard
51934 \begin_inset space ~
51938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51940 reference "tab:Units"
51944 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51945 and used in this documentation.
51948 \begin_layout Standard
51949 \begin_inset Float table
51956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51957 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51975 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51983 \begin_inset Tabular
51984 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51985 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51986 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51987 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52141 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52412 scaled point (65536
52413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52480 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52604 % of original image width
52609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52693 \begin_layout Standard
52694 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52697 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52704 \begin_layout Bibliography
52705 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52706 LatexCommand bibitem
52713 The \SpecialChar LyX
52715 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52718 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52724 \begin_inset Newline newline
52728 \begin_inset Flex URL
52731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52733 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52741 \begin_layout Bibliography
52742 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52743 LatexCommand bibitem
52744 key "latexcompanion"
52749 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52751 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52752 Companion Second Edition.
52755 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52758 \begin_layout Bibliography
52759 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52760 LatexCommand bibitem
52766 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52769 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52773 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52776 \begin_layout Bibliography
52777 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52778 LatexCommand bibitem
52787 : A Document Preparation System.
52790 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52793 \begin_layout Bibliography
52794 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52795 LatexCommand bibitem
52805 The \SpecialChar TeX
52809 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52812 \begin_layout Bibliography
52813 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52814 LatexCommand bibitem
52820 The \SpecialChar TeX
52822 \begin_inset Newline newline
52826 \begin_inset Flex URL
52829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52831 https://ctan.org/topic
52839 \begin_layout Bibliography
52840 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52841 LatexCommand bibitem
52847 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52849 \begin_inset Newline newline
52853 \begin_inset Flex URL
52856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52858 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52866 \begin_layout Bibliography
52867 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52868 LatexCommand bibitem
52875 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52877 name "Documentation"
52878 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52885 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52889 \begin_inset Newline newline
52893 \begin_inset Flex URL
52896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52898 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52906 \begin_layout Bibliography
52907 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52908 LatexCommand bibitem
52915 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52917 name "Documentation"
52918 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52923 how to use the program
52925 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52929 \begin_inset Newline newline
52933 \begin_inset Flex URL
52936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52938 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52946 \begin_layout Bibliography
52947 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52948 LatexCommand bibitem
52955 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52957 name "Documentation"
52958 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52963 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52969 \begin_inset Index idx
52972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52974 packages ! biblatex
52980 \begin_inset Newline newline
52984 \begin_inset Flex URL
52987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52989 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52997 \begin_layout Bibliography
52998 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52999 LatexCommand bibitem
53006 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53008 name "Documentation"
53009 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53014 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53020 \begin_inset Index idx
53023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53031 \begin_inset Newline newline
53035 \begin_inset Flex URL
53038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53040 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53048 \begin_layout Bibliography
53049 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53050 LatexCommand bibitem
53057 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53059 name "Documentation"
53060 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53070 \begin_inset Newline newline
53074 \begin_inset Flex URL
53077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53079 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53087 \begin_layout Bibliography
53088 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53089 LatexCommand bibitem
53090 key "makeindex-man"
53096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53099 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53109 \begin_inset Newline newline
53113 \begin_inset Flex URL
53116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53118 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53126 \begin_layout Bibliography
53127 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53128 LatexCommand bibitem
53135 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53137 name "Documentation"
53138 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53148 \begin_inset Newline newline
53152 \begin_inset Flex URL
53155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53157 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53165 \begin_layout Bibliography
53166 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53167 LatexCommand bibitem
53174 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53176 name "Documentation"
53177 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53182 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53184 \begin_inset Newline newline
53188 \begin_inset Flex URL
53191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53193 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53201 \begin_layout Bibliography
53202 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53203 LatexCommand bibitem
53210 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53212 name "Documentation"
53213 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53218 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53224 \begin_inset Index idx
53227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53235 \begin_inset Newline newline
53239 \begin_inset Flex URL
53242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53244 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53252 \begin_layout Bibliography
53253 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53254 LatexCommand bibitem
53261 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53263 name "Documentation"
53264 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53269 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53275 \begin_inset Index idx
53278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53280 packages ! enumitem
53286 \begin_inset Newline newline
53290 \begin_inset Flex URL
53293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53295 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53303 \begin_layout Bibliography
53304 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53305 LatexCommand bibitem
53312 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53314 name "Documentation"
53315 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53320 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53326 \begin_inset Index idx
53329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53331 packages ! fancyhdr
53337 \begin_inset Newline newline
53341 \begin_inset Flex URL
53344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53346 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53354 \begin_layout Bibliography
53355 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53356 LatexCommand bibitem
53363 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53365 name "Documentation"
53366 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53371 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53377 \begin_inset Index idx
53380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53382 packages ! hyperref
53388 \begin_inset Newline newline
53392 \begin_inset Flex URL
53395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53397 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53405 \begin_layout Bibliography
53406 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53407 LatexCommand bibitem
53414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53416 name "Documentation"
53417 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53422 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53428 \begin_inset Index idx
53431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53433 packages ! microtype
53439 \begin_inset Newline newline
53443 \begin_inset Flex URL
53446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53448 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53456 \begin_layout Bibliography
53457 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53458 LatexCommand bibitem
53465 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53467 name "Documentation"
53468 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53473 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53479 \begin_inset Index idx
53482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53490 \begin_inset Newline newline
53494 \begin_inset Flex URL
53497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53499 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53507 \begin_layout Bibliography
53508 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53509 LatexCommand bibitem
53516 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53518 name "Documentation"
53519 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53524 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53530 \begin_inset Index idx
53533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53535 packages ! prettyref
53541 \begin_inset Newline newline
53545 \begin_inset Flex URL
53548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53550 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53558 \begin_layout Bibliography
53559 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53560 LatexCommand bibitem
53567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53569 name "Documentation"
53570 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53575 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53581 \begin_inset Index idx
53584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53586 packages ! refstyle
53592 \begin_inset Newline newline
53596 \begin_inset Flex URL
53599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53601 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53609 \begin_layout Bibliography
53610 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53611 LatexCommand bibitem
53618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53621 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53626 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53628 \begin_inset Newline newline
53632 \begin_inset Flex URL
53635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53637 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53645 \begin_layout Bibliography
53646 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53647 LatexCommand bibitem
53654 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53657 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53662 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53664 \begin_inset Newline newline
53668 \begin_inset Flex URL
53671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53673 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53681 \begin_layout Bibliography
53682 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53683 LatexCommand bibitem
53690 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53693 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53698 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53699 for Cyrillic languages:
53700 \begin_inset Newline newline
53704 \begin_inset Flex URL
53707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53709 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53717 \begin_layout Bibliography
53718 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53719 LatexCommand bibitem
53726 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53729 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53734 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53736 \begin_inset Newline newline
53740 \begin_inset Flex URL
53743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53745 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53753 \begin_layout Bibliography
53754 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53755 LatexCommand bibitem
53762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53765 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53770 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53772 \begin_inset Newline newline
53776 \begin_inset Flex URL
53779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53781 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53789 \begin_layout Bibliography
53790 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53791 LatexCommand bibitem
53798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53801 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53806 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53808 \begin_inset Newline newline
53812 \begin_inset Flex URL
53815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53817 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53825 \begin_layout Standard
53826 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53860 \begin_inset Note Note
53863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53870 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53871 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53872 bibliography is the second one:
53880 \begin_layout Standard
53881 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53882 LatexCommand bibtex
53883 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53884 options "biblio/alphadin"
53891 \begin_layout Standard
53892 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53896 \begin_layout Standard
53900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53906 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53915 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53923 \begin_inset Note Note
53926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53927 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53928 \begin_inset space ~
53932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53934 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53946 \begin_layout Standard
53947 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53948 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53954 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53955 LatexCommand printindex